WO2021185204A1 - Optical fiber port identification method and apparatus, communication system, and network device - Google Patents

Optical fiber port identification method and apparatus, communication system, and network device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021185204A1
WO2021185204A1 PCT/CN2021/080796 CN2021080796W WO2021185204A1 WO 2021185204 A1 WO2021185204 A1 WO 2021185204A1 CN 2021080796 W CN2021080796 W CN 2021080796W WO 2021185204 A1 WO2021185204 A1 WO 2021185204A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
optical fiber
signal
port
link
fiber link
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/080796
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
李自亮
潘超
邓宁
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021185204A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021185204A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B10/00Transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio-waves, e.g. infrared, visible or ultraviolet light, or employing corpuscular radiation, e.g. quantum communication
    • H04B10/07Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems
    • H04B10/071Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems using a reflected signal, e.g. using optical time domain reflectometers [OTDR]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B10/00Transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio-waves, e.g. infrared, visible or ultraviolet light, or employing corpuscular radiation, e.g. quantum communication
    • H04B10/07Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems
    • H04B10/075Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems using an in-service signal
    • H04B10/077Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems using an in-service signal using a supervisory or additional signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B10/00Transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio-waves, e.g. infrared, visible or ultraviolet light, or employing corpuscular radiation, e.g. quantum communication
    • H04B10/07Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems
    • H04B10/075Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems using an in-service signal
    • H04B10/079Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems using an in-service signal using measurements of the data signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B10/00Transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio-waves, e.g. infrared, visible or ultraviolet light, or employing corpuscular radiation, e.g. quantum communication
    • H04B10/07Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems
    • H04B10/075Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems using an in-service signal
    • H04B10/079Arrangements for monitoring or testing transmission systems; Arrangements for fault measurement of transmission systems using an in-service signal using measurements of the data signal
    • H04B10/0791Fault location on the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B10/00Transmission systems employing electromagnetic waves other than radio-waves, e.g. infrared, visible or ultraviolet light, or employing corpuscular radiation, e.g. quantum communication
    • H04B10/50Transmitters
    • H04B10/516Details of coding or modulation

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of optical fiber communication technology, and in particular to an optical fiber port identification method and device, communication system, and network equipment.
  • a communication system usually includes multiple optical fiber links and devices connected to the optical fiber links, and the devices in the communication system can communicate through the connected optical fiber links.
  • Optical fiber links in communication systems are often more complicated, and there are more optical fiber ports on each optical fiber link. Therefore, it is often necessary to identify the fiber port on the fiber link to accurately connect the device to the corresponding fiber link.
  • This application provides an optical fiber port identification method and device, a communication system, and network equipment, which can be applied to the identification of optical fiber ports of relatively complex optical fiber links.
  • the technical solutions are as follows:
  • a method for identifying an optical fiber port is provided for a first device, and the first device is connected to a plurality of optical fiber links.
  • the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different; the dimming unit on the optical fiber link is used for reflection
  • the signal in the first waveband, and the sum of the reflectivity of all the dimming units on the optical fiber link to the signal in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1.
  • the method includes: after the first device obtains the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, according to the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link and the obtained target signal, Optical fiber port for identification.
  • the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link, and the multiple optical fiber links include the first optical fiber link, and the code from the first optical fiber link
  • the signal is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first waveband by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
  • the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link can be determined according to the encoded signal from the optical fiber link, and then the optical fiber port can be identified according to the arrangement rule.
  • there is no need to change the basic structure of the communication system and only minor changes are made to part of the structure of the communication system, which reduces the cost of improvement and the complexity of project implementation, thereby facilitating subsequent management and maintenance.
  • the link detection of the communication system with more optical fiber links and optical fiber ports is realized, thereby It can be applied to more complicated communication systems.
  • the parameters of each dimming unit are the same. Therefore, there is no need to set multiple dimming units with different parameters on the optical fiber link; the wavelength of the signal in the first band emitted by the device can be less. (Such as unique), so that the device does not need to send out multiple signals of different wavelengths.
  • the device can automatically realize the recognition of the optical fiber port without manual participation, which improves the degree of automation and the recognition efficiency of the optical fiber port, and reduces the error rate.
  • the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link includes: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link At least one of the position and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link.
  • the arrangement rule includes: the number of dimming units on the optical fiber link, the position of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the interval between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link as an example.
  • the optical fiber link is provided with a plurality of optical fiber ports, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold, and is divided by the plurality of optical fiber ports.
  • the distance of the other optical fiber ports other than each optical fiber port is greater than or equal to the distance threshold; according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, the distance between the optical fiber ports on the first optical fiber link.
  • the first device may first determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal;
  • the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the upper and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link.
  • the detection sub-signal is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first waveband by the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port.
  • the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged in the plurality of In at least part of the target positions, and the at least part of the target positions includes: the first target position and the last target position in the plurality of target positions;
  • the unit time length is: the time required for the signal in the first waveband to be transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the multiple target positions.
  • the first device may first perform the first detection on the encoded signal when identifying the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal. Periodic detection. Exemplarily, in each cycle of detection, the first device first detects the first high potential in the received encoded signal. After detecting the first high potential, the first device may detect the position of the coded signal every unit time, and stop the detection after the fourth detection. In the process of each detection, the first device needs to determine whether the potential of the encoded signal at the current moment is a high potential or a low potential.
  • the first device can detect the first high potential according to the first detection, and As a result of these four detections, the detection sub-signal corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the first fiber port is generated.
  • the number of times that the first device detects positions in the coded signal every unit time may be one less than the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port; in this application, 5 targets corresponding to each fiber port are used. The position is taken as an example, so the number of times of detecting the position every unit duration in the coded signal is 4.
  • the first device may continue to detect the encoded signal for the second cycle to obtain the detection sub-signal corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the second optical fiber port. It should be noted that after the detection of the second cycle ends, the first device can still continue to perform more cycles of detection of the encoded signal until the entire detection of the encoded signal is completed.
  • the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the same order of optical fiber ports on different optical fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: approaching or farther away from the The direction of the first device; the method further includes: determining the sequence corresponding to each fiber port on each fiber link, the sequence corresponding to the fiber port is: in the target direction, the fiber port is in The sequence of the multiple optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link; the first device detects the sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  • the target signal when identifying the fiber port on the first fiber link, in the target direction, if the dimming reflected by the detection sub-signal corresponding to the fiber port of the target order on the first fiber link
  • the arrangement rule of the unit is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first optical fiber port, and the first device can identify the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link as the first optical fiber link.
  • An optical fiber port, and the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
  • each optical fiber link when each optical fiber link overlaps, the first device is connected with multi-level branches, and each level of the branch includes multiple branches; each first-level branch is connected to the first device Connection, each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches, and the lower-level branches connected by different branches are different; the optical fiber link includes: one of the branches of each level in the multi-level branch Branch; the optical fiber ports set on the optical fiber link include: the optical fiber ports on each branch close to the first device; the arrangement of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on different first branch branches is different, and the same branch The arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to each other are different; the method further includes: determining the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein each optical fiber port on the first-level branch corresponds to The port group includes: the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch; the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each level i branch includes: the optical fiber port on each level i branch, and the each The optical fiber port
  • the multiple first-level branches are all connected to the first device through the initial branch; a part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located in the optical fiber On the branch where the port is located, another part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located on the branch connected to the optical fiber port.
  • the foregoing first waveband signal may be sent by the second device to the first optical fiber link.
  • the first device is connected to the second device via the first optical fiber link, and the receiving the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link includes: receiving the signal sent by the second device via the first optical fiber link The coded signal; wherein the coded signal is a signal sent by the second device after sending a signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, and the dimming unit is also used to transmit For signals outside the first waveband, the wavelength of the coded signal is outside the first waveband.
  • the foregoing first waveband signal may be sent by the first device to the first optical fiber link.
  • the method further includes: sending the signal in the first wavelength band to the first optical fiber link.
  • the method further includes: determining a reference signal of each optical fiber link, where the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link; When the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement rule indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, it is determined that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
  • the method further includes: determining the failed link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
  • the dimming unit includes: a grating (such as a chirped fiber bragg grating (CFBG)), a semi-transparent and semi-reflective film, and the like.
  • a grating such as a chirped fiber bragg grating (CFBG)
  • CFBG fiber bragg grating
  • the bandwidth of the first waveband ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the absolute value of the difference between the wavelength of the signal in the first waveband and the center wavelength of the first waveband is ⁇ 5 nanometers .
  • the bandwidth of the first waveband is larger, and the center wavelength of the first waveband is close to the wavelength of the first waveband signal, even if the dimming unit is affected by the environment, the center wavelength of the waveband reflected by the dimming unit The offset can still ensure that the dimming unit can reflect the signal in the first waveband emitted by the second device, and avoid the function of the dimming unit from being affected by the environment.
  • an optical fiber port identification method for a second device, the second device is connected to a first device through a first optical fiber link, and the first device is connected to a plurality of optical fiber links, so
  • the first optical fiber link is any optical fiber link among the multiple optical fiber links, and the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port, and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port, and different optical fiber chains
  • the arrangement rules of the dimming units on the road are different; the dimming units are used to reflect signals in the first waveband and transmit signals outside the first waveband, and the dimming unit pairs on the optical fiber link
  • the sum of the reflectances of the signals in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1; the method includes: the second device first sends the signals in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, and receives the first optical fiber link.
  • the first device sends a coded signal, and the wavelength of the coded signal is outside the first waveband.
  • the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link includes: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link At least one of the position and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link.
  • an optical fiber port identification device for use in a first device, and the optical fiber port identification device includes various modules for executing the optical fiber port identification method provided in the first aspect.
  • the optical fiber port identification device includes: a receiving module, a first sending module, and a processing module, wherein the receiving module includes: a filter and a circulator; the processing module is respectively connected to the first sending module and the Circulator, the circulator is connected to the filter and the first transmission module, the filter is connected to the first optical fiber link; the processing module is used to control the first transmission module to the ring
  • the circulator sends the signal of the first waveband; the circulator is used to send the signal from the first sending module to the filter, and the filter is used to send the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link.
  • the signal; the filter is used to receive the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, and to send the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator; the circulator is used to The processing module sends the encoded signal from the filter.
  • an optical fiber port identification device for use in a second device, and the optical fiber port identification device includes various modules for executing the optical fiber port identification method provided in the second aspect.
  • the optical fiber port identification device includes: a receiving module, a first sending module, a second sending module, and a processing module, wherein the receiving module includes: a filter and a circulator; the receiving module includes: a filter and a circulator The processing module is respectively connected to the first sending module, the second sending module and the circulator, the circulator is connected to the filter and the first sending module, and the filter is connected to the The second sending module and the first optical fiber link; the processing module is used to control the first sending module to send the first waveband signal to the circulator; the circulator is used to send the filter The filter sends the signal from the first sending module; the filter is used to send the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link; the filter is used to receive the modulation on the first optical fiber link The signal in the first waveband reflected by the optical unit, and the signal from the first optical fiber link is sent to the circulator; the circulator is used to send the signal from the filter to the processing module; The processing module is used to control the second sending module to send the
  • a communication system in a fifth aspect, includes: a first device, and a plurality of optical fiber links connected to the first device, the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port, and the optical fiber There are multiple dimming units corresponding to the port, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different; the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the optical fiber link is dimmed
  • the sum of the reflectivity of the unit to the signals of the first waveband is less than or equal to 1
  • the first device includes: the optical fiber port identification device provided in the third aspect.
  • the communication system further includes: a second device, and the first device is connected to the second device through a first optical fiber link; the second device includes: the optical fiber port identification provided by the fourth aspect Device.
  • an optical fiber port identification method is provided, which is characterized in that it is used in the communication system provided in the fifth aspect.
  • the method includes: the first device obtains each optical fiber link among the plurality of optical fiber links.
  • the target signal of the optical fiber port on the road, the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link;
  • the first device receives the optical fiber from the first optical fiber
  • the encoded signal of the link, the plurality of optical fiber links include the first optical fiber link, and the encoded signal is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first wavelength band by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link
  • the first device identifies the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link based on the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  • the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link includes: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link At least one of the position and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link.
  • the optical fiber link is provided with a plurality of optical fiber ports, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold, and is divided by the plurality of optical fiber ports.
  • the distance of the other optical fiber ports except for each optical fiber port is greater than or equal to the distance threshold; the first device performs a correction on the first optical fiber port according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  • the identification of the optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link includes: the first device determines the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein the detection sub-signal is determined by the The plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are obtained after reflecting the signal in the first waveband; the first device detects sub-signals corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, And the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, identifying the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link.
  • the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged in the plurality of At least part of the target positions in the target position, and the at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position in the plurality of target positions; the first device determines that the coded signal corresponds to The detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link includes: the first device determines that the encoded signal corresponds to the The detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link; wherein, the unit duration is: the signal in the first waveband is transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the plurality of target positions The length of time required.
  • the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports in the same order on different fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: a direction close to or away from the first device; the method It also includes: the first device determines the sequence corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, and the sequence corresponding to the optical fiber port is: in the target direction, the optical fiber port is located in the optical fiber chain.
  • the sequence among the multiple optical fiber ports on the road; the first device according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, Identifying the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link includes: in the target direction, if the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link reflects the dimming unit
  • the arrangement rule is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first optical fiber port, and the first device recognizes the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link as the first Optical fiber port, the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
  • the first device is connected to multiple branches, and each branch includes multiple branches; each first-level branch is connected to the first device, and each branch is connected to multiple downstream branches.
  • the first-level branch is connected, and the next-level branches connected by different branches are different;
  • the optical fiber link includes: one branch in each level of the multi-level branch;
  • the optical fiber link is set
  • the optical fiber ports include: the optical fiber ports on each branch near the first device; the arrangement of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on different first branches is different, and the optical fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to the same branch correspond to The arrangement rules of the dimming units are different;
  • the method further includes: the first device determines the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch includes: The optical fiber port on each level 1 branch; the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each i-th level branch includes: the optical fiber port on each i-th level branch, and each i-th level branch The optical
  • the multiple first-level branches are all connected to the first device through an initial branch; a part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located, and the optical fiber port The other part of the corresponding dimming unit is located on the branch connected to the optical fiber port.
  • the method further includes: the first device sends the signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link .
  • the optical fiber system further includes: a second device, and the first device is connected to the second device through the first optical fiber link, and the dimming unit is also used to transmit the first device. Signals outside the band; before the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, the method further includes: the second device sends the signals in the first wavelength band to the first optical fiber link Signal; the second device receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link; the second device is based on the signal received from the first optical fiber link , Sending an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first wavelength band; the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, including : The first device receives the encoded signal sent by the second device through the first optical fiber link.
  • the method further includes: the first device determines the reference signal of each optical fiber link, and the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: Arrangement law; when the arrangement law of the dimming unit reflected by the coded signal is different from the arrangement law indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, the first device determines the first optical fiber The link is down.
  • the method further includes: the first device determines the faulty link in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal Road section.
  • the dimming unit includes: a grating.
  • the bandwidth of the first waveband ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the absolute value of the difference between the wavelength of the signal in the first waveband and the center wavelength of the first waveband is ⁇ 5 nanometers .
  • the first device includes: a first transmission module, a filter, a circulator, and a processing module; the processing module is respectively connected to the first transmission module and the circulator, and the circulator is connected to the A filter and the first sending module, and the filter is connected to the first optical fiber link; the first device sending a signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link includes: the The processing module controls the first sending module to send the first waveband signal to the circulator; the circulator sends the signal from the first sending module to the filter; the filter sends the signal from the first sending module to the filter; The first optical fiber link sends the signal from the circulator; the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, including: the filter receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link The filter sends the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator; the circulator sends the encoded signal from the filter to the processing module.
  • the second device includes: a first sending module, a filter, a circulator, a second sending module, and a processing module; the processing module is respectively connected to the first sending module, the second sending module, and The circulator, the circulator connects the filter and the first transmission module, and the filter connects the second transmission module and the first optical fiber link; the second device sends the The first optical fiber link sends the signal in the first waveband, including: the processing module controls the first sending module to send the signal of the first waveband to the circulator; and the circulator sends the signal to the filter
  • the device sends the signal from the first sending module; the filter sends the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link; the second device receives the dimming on the first optical fiber link
  • the signal in the first waveband reflected by the unit includes: the filter receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link;
  • the circulator sends the signal from the first optical fiber link; the circulator sends the signal from the filter to
  • a computer storage medium is provided, and a computer program is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the optical fiber port identification method of the first aspect or the second aspect is implemented.
  • a computer program product containing instructions when the computer program product runs on a network device, the network device executes the optical fiber port identification method described in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a network device in a ninth aspect, includes: at least one processor, at least one interface, memory, and at least one communication bus.
  • the processor is configured to execute a program stored in the memory to implement the first The optical fiber port identification method according to the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a PON system provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the reflection of optical signals by a dimming unit provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for identifying an optical fiber port according to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical fiber port identification device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is a timing diagram of an encoded signal sent by a second device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a failure of an optical fiber link according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a failure of another optical fiber link provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a failure of another optical fiber link provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a failure of another optical fiber link provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical fiber port identification device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 15 is a schematic structural diagram of another optical fiber port identification device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the technical solution provided in this application can be applied to a communication system.
  • the communication system includes multiple optical fiber links and multiple devices connected by the multiple optical fiber links.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the multiple optical fiber links in the communication system can be independent of each other.
  • the multiple optical fiber links in the communication system are: optical fiber link a1 to optical fiber link a8, and multiple devices in the communication system include device 10 and device 11.
  • the device 10 and the device 11 are connected to the optical fiber link a1 to the optical fiber link a8 as an example.
  • each device in the communication system can be connected to one or more optical fiber links in the communication system. connect.
  • multiple devices in the communication system include: device 10 to device 18, where device 10 is connected to one end of optical fiber link a1 to fiber link a8, and device 11 to device 18 are Each device is connected to the other end of the optical fiber link a1 to the optical fiber link a8 in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • each optical fiber link in the communication system may be provided with an optical fiber port and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different. It should be noted that each optical fiber link may be provided with at least one optical fiber port with corresponding multiple dimming units. In the embodiment of the present application, each optical fiber link is provided with multiple optical fiber ports, and each The optical fiber ports all have multiple corresponding dimming units as an example.
  • the optical fiber ports on each optical fiber link may include: two optical fiber ports at both ends of the optical fiber link.
  • the fiber ports on the fiber link a1 include: fiber ports b1 and c1
  • the fiber ports on the fiber link a2 include: fiber ports b2 and c2
  • the fiber ports on the fiber link a3 include: : Fiber ports b3 and c3
  • fiber ports on fiber link a4 include: fiber ports b4 and c4
  • fiber ports on fiber link a5 include: fiber ports b5 and c5
  • fiber ports on fiber link a6 include: fiber Ports b6 and c6
  • the fiber ports on the fiber link a7 include: fiber ports b7 and c7
  • the fiber ports on the fiber link a8 include: fiber ports b8 and c8.
  • the communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a passive optical network (PON) system or other communication system, as long as the communication system includes devices connected through multiple optical fiber links.
  • the PON system may be an Ethernet passive optical network (ethernet passive optical network, EPON) system or a gigabit passive optical network (gigabit capable passive optical network, GPON) system, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the PON system includes: optical line terminal (OLT), optical dstribution frame (ODF), home cable transfer box, and optical line terminal (ONT) (Or optical network unit (OUN), ONT is taken as an example in Figure 3) and multiple devices in the network.
  • ONT optical line terminal
  • OUN optical network unit
  • the PON system may include at least one OLT (only one OLT is shown in FIG. 3) and multiple ONTs (only three ONTs are shown in FIG. 3), and each OLT is connected with multiple ONTs.
  • the PON system includes multiple OLTs, there may be a connection relationship between the multiple OLTs.
  • the equipment in the communication system may include: equipment connected through multiple optical fiber links in the PON system, such as an OLT and multiple ONTs, or OLT and ODF, or multiple OLTs.
  • optical fiber links in the current communication system are usually more complicated, and there are more optical fiber ports on each optical fiber link. Therefore, it is often necessary to identify the fiber port on the fiber link to accurately connect the device to the corresponding fiber link.
  • a large number of optical fiber passive components are often installed on optical fiber links, and optical fiber passive components are easily damaged by the external environment (such as fiber port damage, fiber bending or fiber breakage, etc.), resulting in fiber link failure and communication
  • the optical fiber communication of the system is interrupted. Therefore, there is an urgent need for a method suitable for optical fiber port identification of relatively complex optical fiber links and fault detection of optical fiber links.
  • multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port are provided on each of the multiple fiber links to realize the identification of the fiber ports on the fiber links and the monitoring of the fiber links. Troubleshooting.
  • the device can first determine multiple The target signal of each fiber port on the fiber link, the target signal of the fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port on the fiber link; after that, the device needs to receive the signal from the first fiber link Encode the signal, and identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and perform fault detection on the first optical fiber link according to the previously acquired target signal of each optical fiber port and the encoded signal.
  • the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the sum of the reflectivity of all the dimming units on each optical fiber link to the signal in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1.
  • the above-mentioned encoded signal may be The signal obtained after the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link reflects the signal in the first waveband, and the signal can reflect the arrangement law of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link. Therefore, after comparing the previously acquired target signal of each optical fiber port with the encoded signal, the device can identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and realize the failure of the first optical fiber link. Detection.
  • Multiple dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link can be arranged near the optical fiber port.
  • the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port is relatively close (for example, less than the distance threshold), and there are multiple fiber ports on the fiber link, the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port is related to the multiple fiber ports.
  • the other fiber ports in the fiber port are far away (for example, greater than or equal to the distance threshold).
  • the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 in Figures 1 and 2 include: 5 dimming units on the fiber link a1 close to the fiber port b1, and the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c1 include: fiber chain The five dimming units on the road a1 close to the optical fiber port c1, and the multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port b2 include: 4 dimming units on the optical fiber link a2 close to the optical fiber port b2.
  • Each optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port, and the plurality of target positions are arranged at equal intervals; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged at least part of the corresponding optical fiber port At the target position, and the at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position corresponding to the optical fiber port.
  • the optical fiber link a1 is provided with five target positions corresponding to the optical fiber port b1, namely positions w1 to w5.
  • the five target positions are arranged at equal intervals, and the five target positions corresponding to the optical fiber port b1 are arranged at equal intervals.
  • the light unit can be located at these 5 target positions.
  • 5 target positions corresponding to each fiber port can also be set on other optical fiber links, and the 5 target positions can be all equipped with dimming units, or some of the target positions can be equipped with dimming units. Unit, and another part of the target position is not provided with a dimming unit. However, the first target position and the last target position of the 5 target positions are both provided with a dimming unit.
  • the arrangement rules of dimming units on different optical fiber links in multiple optical fiber links are different.
  • the arrangement of the dimming units on the eight optical fiber links a1 to a8 in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2 are different from each other.
  • the arrangement of dimming units on the fiber link includes: the number of dimming units on the fiber link, the position of the dimming unit on the fiber link, and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the fiber link At least one of them.
  • the arrangement rule includes: the number of dimming units on the optical fiber link, the position of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the interval between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link as an example.
  • the dimming corresponding to the fiber ports in the same order on different fiber links can be any direction.
  • the target direction can be any direction.
  • the optical fiber port close to the device 10 in the optical fiber link is the first optical fiber port, and it is indicated by whether a dimming unit is provided on multiple target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port.
  • the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is assumed that the optical fiber port close to the device 10 in the optical fiber link.
  • the arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the first fiber port b1 on the optical fiber link a1 can be expressed as 11111, which means that the 5 target positions corresponding to the fiber port b1 are all provided with dimming units.
  • the arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the first fiber port b2 on the fiber link a2 can be expressed as 11101, which means that the first to third target positions and the fifth target position corresponding to the fiber port b1 are set There is a dimming unit, but the 4th target position is not equipped with a dimming unit.
  • the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port has a unique arrangement rule. Therefore, the optical fiber port identification or fault detection of the optical fiber link can be realized based on the arrangement rule.
  • the distance between different dimming units corresponding to the same optical fiber port on the optical fiber link is small, and the optical fiber chain The distance between different dimming units corresponding to different fiber ports on the road is relatively large.
  • the distances between the five dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 on the fiber link a1 are small, but the five dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 on the fiber link a1 and the fiber port c1
  • the corresponding 5 dimming units have a larger spacing. It should be noted that these pitches are only schematically shown in the drawings of the specification.
  • the distance between different dimming units corresponding to the same fiber port on the fiber link is small, such as 10 cm, 20 cm, etc., and the distance between different dimming units corresponding to different fiber ports on the fiber link is often larger, for example, 100 meters , 1000 meters, 10000 meters, etc.
  • the dimming unit in the embodiment of the present application is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the sum of the reflectance of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link to the signal in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1.
  • the dimming unit can also be used to transmit signals outside the first waveband.
  • the dimming unit is a structure with a transflective function, such as a grating (such as a chirped fiber bragg grating (CFBG)), a transflective film, and the like.
  • CFBG fiber bragg grating
  • the "transflective" here means that part of the signal is transmitted and part of the signal is reflected, and the proportion of the transmitted signal and the proportion of the reflected signal may be equal or different.
  • the sum of the reflectivities of all the dimming units on each optical fiber link to the first waveband signal is less than or equal to 1, which can prevent some dimming units on the optical fiber link from reflecting all the first waveband signals. In this way, when the first waveband signal is transmitted on the optical fiber link, each dimming unit on the optical fiber link can receive the first waveband signal, and all the first waveband signals can be received. The signal is reflected.
  • the range of the reflectivity of each dimming unit to the signal of the first waveband is [1%, 10%].
  • the reflectance is set to be small, which can reduce the superposition of the first waveband signal reflected by multiple dimming units on the optical fiber link, and weaken the dimming unit The ghosting phenomenon caused by the superposition of the reflected signals.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the reflection of an optical signal by a dimming unit provided in an embodiment of the application.
  • the reflectivity of the unit to the optical signal of the corresponding wavelength may include 1570 nm to 1580 nm
  • the light reflectivity of the dimming unit for light from 1570 nm to 1580 nm is greater than zero and less than or equal to 2%
  • the center wavelength of the dimming unit is 1575 nm.
  • the parameters of each dimming unit on multiple optical fiber links may be the same.
  • the parameters of the dimming unit include: the length of the CFBG (such as 1 cm, 2 cm, etc.), the chirp coefficient, and the like.
  • the embodiment of the application Based on the communication system in which each optical fiber link is independent of each other provided by the embodiment of the application (the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2), the embodiment of the application provides a method for identifying an optical fiber port for the communication system.
  • the optical fiber port identification method includes:
  • the first device determines the target signal of each optical fiber port on the multiple optical fiber links, and the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link.
  • the first device may be any device in the communication system that can obtain the target signal of each optical fiber port on multiple optical fiber links, such as the device 10 in the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
  • the first device may be located in a central office (centeroffice, CO), which is also called a site.
  • CO central office
  • the first device may be an OLT.
  • optical fiber links may all be connected to the first device.
  • optical fiber ports and the dimming unit provided on the optical fiber links reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments, and the embodiments of the present application will not be repeated here.
  • the first device needs to determine the target signal of each optical fiber port on the multiple optical fiber links to which it is connected in S101.
  • the target signal of each optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link.
  • the target signal of each fiber port can be stored in the first device by the staff.
  • the target signal of each optical fiber port may be used to indicate the arrangement law of multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port.
  • the target signal of each optical fiber port may include multiple bits, the multiple bits correspond to multiple target positions corresponding to the optical fiber port, and the value of each bit is used to indicate whether the corresponding target position is set There is a dimming unit.
  • the value of the bit is 1, it means that the target position corresponding to the bit is provided with a dimming unit, and when the value of the bit is 0, it means that the target position corresponding to the bit is not provided with a dimming unit.
  • the target signal of each optical fiber port in FIG. 1 obtained according to this rule can be as shown in Table 1.
  • the second device sends a signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link.
  • the optical fiber system further includes a second device, and the first device is connected to the second device through the first optical fiber link.
  • the second device may be the device 11 in the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
  • the second device may be located in a central office, for example, the second device and the first device are located in the same central office, or the second device and the first device are located in a different central office.
  • the second device may also be located outside the central office, which is not limited in this embodiment of the application.
  • the second device may be a device such as an ONT, an OUN, an ODF, which is different from the first device, or an OLT, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the identification of the optical fiber port of the first optical fiber link is taken as an example.
  • the first optical fiber link may be any optical fiber link among the above-mentioned multiple optical fiber links.
  • the identification process can refer to the process of identifying the optical fiber port of the first optical fiber link.
  • the second device can send a signal in the first wavelength band (such as a signal of a certain wavelength in the first wavelength band) to the first optical fiber link to facilitate the first optical fiber link.
  • the dimming unit on the link can reflect the signal back to the second device after receiving the signal.
  • the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link can reflect the arrangement of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link. Therefore, the subsequent operations can be based on the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit.
  • the signal of the optical fiber port is identified.
  • the bandwidth of the first waveband can range from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, or other ranges (such as 3 nanometers to 12 nanometers, etc.).
  • the absolute value of the difference in wavelength can be less than or equal to 5 nanometers. In this way, since the bandwidth of the first waveband is larger, and the center wavelength of the first waveband is closer to the wavelength of the first waveband signal, even if the dimming unit is affected by the environment, the center of the waveband reflected by the dimming unit The wavelength shift can still ensure that the dimming unit can reflect the signal in the first waveband emitted by the second device, and avoid the function of the dimming unit from being affected by the environment.
  • the reflectance of the dimming unit to the signal of the first waveband is set to be small, for example, the range of reflectance is [1%, 10%]. In this way, after the second device sends the first waveband signal to the first optical fiber link, the superposition of the first waveband signal reflected by each dimming unit on the first optical fiber link is less, thereby reducing the ghosting phenomenon caused by signal superposition.
  • the structure of the second device may refer to the structure of the optical fiber port identification device as shown in FIG. 6, please refer to FIG. 6.
  • the optical fiber port identification device includes: a first transmission module 601, a filter 602, a circulator 603, The second sending module 604 and the processing module 605 (such as a microcontroller unit (MCU)).
  • the processing module 605 is respectively connected to the first sending module 601, the second sending module 604, and the circulator 603, the circulator 603 is connected to the filter 602 and the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 is connected to the second sending module 604 and the aforementioned first sending module.
  • Fiber optic link such as a microcontroller unit (MCU)
  • the first sending module 601 is used to send a signal to the circulator 603; the circulator 603 is used to send the signal from the first sending module 601 to the filter 602 and the signal from the filter 602 to the processing module 605;
  • the filter 602 is used to send the signals from the circulator 603 and the second sending module 604 to the first optical fiber link, and the signal from the first optical link to the circulator 603;
  • the processing module 605 is used to control the first optical fiber link.
  • the sending module 601 sends signals to the circulator 603, and controls the second sending module 604 to send signals to the filter 602.
  • the first sending module 601 is used to send out signals in the first waveband, and the second sending module 604 is used to send out signals outside the first waveband.
  • the processing module 605 in the second device can control the first sending module 601 to send the signal in the first band to the circulator 603; after that, the circulator 603 will send the signal from the first sending module 601 to the filter 602 Finally, the filter 602 will send the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link. In this way, the purpose of sending the signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link is achieved.
  • the second device receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
  • the filter 602 in the second device will receive the signal in the first band reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link and send it to the circulator 603 sends the signal from the first optical fiber link, and then the circulator 603 sends the signal from the filter 603 to the processing module 605.
  • the processing module 605 in the second device receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
  • the second device sends an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link according to the signal received from the first optical fiber link.
  • the second device may send the encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link.
  • the wavelength of the encoded signal sent by the second device to the first device through the first optical fiber link is outside the first waveband, and the above-mentioned dimming unit is also used to transmit signals outside the first waveband. In this way, the first waveband can be guaranteed.
  • the second device successfully transmits the encoded signal to the first device.
  • the center wavelength of the first wavelength band is 1575 nanometers and the bandwidth is 10 nanometers
  • the center wavelength of the second wavelength band may be 1310 nanometers.
  • the encoded signal is generated according to the signal reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link. Therefore, the encoded signal can reflect the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
  • the second device may perform at least one type of processing on the received signal. For example, the second device first performs photoelectric conversion on the received signal to convert the received signal from an optical signal to an electrical signal; after that, the second device performs clock data recovery processing on the electrical signal to obtain a time domain
  • the encoded electrical signal the electrical signal may include time-domain information that is used to characterize the signal reflected by each dimming unit on the first optical fiber link; finally, the second device may generate the signal based on the electrical signal encoded in the time domain The coded signal outside the first band mentioned above.
  • the first optical fiber link as the optical fiber link a1 in FIG. 1, the first device as the device 10, and the second device as the device 11 as an example. If the first optical fiber link is not faulty, the signal in the first waveband sent by the second device can be transmitted to each dimming unit, and the timing diagram of the encoded signal sent by the second device can be as shown in FIG. 7. Please refer to Figure 7. There are 10 high potentials in this timing diagram, and these 10 high potentials can correspond to 10 dimming units on the optical fiber link a1, and the corresponding high potential of each dimming unit is used to characterize the dimming. The first waveband signal reflected by the unit reaches the device 11.
  • the first 5 of these 10 high potentials are One high potential is used to characterize the first waveband reflected by the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c1 and reaching the device 11, and the last five high potentials are used to characterize the first waveband reflected by the five dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1
  • the signal arrives at device 11.
  • the dimming units corresponding to each fiber port are relatively close, and the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c1 are far away from the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1, the first 5 high
  • the time delay of each high potential among the potentials is small, and the time delay of each high potential of the last five high potentials is also small, and the time delay between the first five high potentials and the last five high potentials is relatively large.
  • the processing module 605 in the second device can control the second sending module 604 to send the above-mentioned encoded signal to the filter 602 according to the signal from the circulator 603, so as to facilitate The filter 602 transmits the signal from the second transmission module 602 to the first optical fiber link. In this way, the encoded signal is sent to the first device through the first optical fiber link.
  • the second device may also include a photoelectric conversion module 606 and The clock data recovery module 607, the photoelectric conversion module 606 and the clock data recovery module 607 are connected in series between the circulator 603 and the processing module 605.
  • the photoelectric conversion module 606 is used to perform photoelectric conversion on the signal from the circulator 603 and send the photoelectrically converted signal to the clock data recovery module 607;
  • the clock data recovery module 607 is used to perform clock data on the signal from the photoelectric conversion module 606 Resume processing, and send the signal after the clock data recovery processing to the processing module 605.
  • the processing module 605 may control the second sending module 604 to send the above-mentioned encoded signal based on the signal from the clock data recovery processing module 607.
  • the second device in FIG. 6 may further include an electric switch 608, and the processing module 605 may use the electric switch 608 to select the modules that need to be controlled among the first sending module 601 and the second sending module 604.
  • the second device when the second device needs to transmit data to the first device, the second device can send the data signal carrying the data to the first device through the first optical fiber link according to the data that needs to be transmitted (belonging to the data signal outside the first band). Signal).
  • the processing module 605 may control the second sending module 604 to send the data signal to the filter 602 according to the data to be transmitted, so that the filter 602 sends the data signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link.
  • the first device identifies the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the target signal and the encoded signal of each optical fiber port.
  • S105 may include:
  • the first device determines a detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal.
  • the first device may first process the encoded signal to identify the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein, the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port It is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first waveband by all the dimming units corresponding to the fiber port.
  • the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged on at least a part of the plurality of target positions, And at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position among the multiple target positions.
  • the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the plurality of target positions may be determined based on the signal in the first band
  • the length of time required for the uplink transmission (referred to as the unit time length), and the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port, determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each fiber port on the first fiber link in the encoded signal.
  • the first device in the identification coded signal corresponds to the detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link
  • the first cycle of the coded signal can be detected first.
  • the first device first detects the first high potential in the received encoded signal (the first high potential from left to right in FIG. 7). After detecting the first high potential, the first device may detect the position of the coded signal every unit time, and stop the detection after the fourth detection. In the process of each detection, the first device needs to determine whether the potential of the encoded signal at the current moment is a high potential or a low potential.
  • the first device can detect the first high potential according to the first detection, and As a result of these four detections, the detection sub-signal corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the first fiber port (c1) is generated, such as 11111. It should be noted that the number of times that the first device detects positions in the encoded signal every unit of time can be one less than the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port; in Figure 1, there are 5 targets corresponding to each fiber port. The position is taken as an example, so the number of times of detecting the position every unit duration in the coded signal is 4.
  • the first device can continue to detect the encoded signal for the second cycle to obtain the detector corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the second fiber port (b1) Signal, such as 11111. It should be noted that after the detection of the second cycle ends, the first device can still continue to perform more cycles of detection of the encoded signal until the entire detection of the encoded signal is completed.
  • the coded signal corresponding to Fig. 7 ends the detection after two cycles of detection.
  • the first device identifies the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the target signal of each optical fiber port and the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link.
  • the first device After the first device obtains the target signal of each optical fiber port in the communication system and the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, it can compare the two parts of the signal to identify the first optical fiber link Various fiber ports on the road.
  • the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the same order of fiber ports on different fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: approaching or away from the first The direction of the device.
  • the first device not only needs to obtain the target signal of each optical fiber port in the communication system, but also needs to determine the sequence corresponding to each optical fiber port in each optical fiber port.
  • the sequence corresponding to each optical fiber port is: in the above-mentioned target direction, the sequence of the optical fiber port among the multiple optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link where it is located.
  • the first device needs to compare the detection sub-signals of the optical fiber ports in each order (order in the target direction) on the first optical fiber link, and compare the target signals of each optical fiber port in the corresponding order in the communication system. To determine whether the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal. In the target direction, if the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal corresponding to the fiber port of the target order on the first fiber link is the same as the arrangement of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first fiber port When the rules are consistent, the first device recognizes the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link as the first optical fiber port. Wherein, the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
  • each optical fiber port in the communication system can be as shown in Table 2.
  • the target direction is the direction close to the device 10 as an example.
  • the fiber port is the first fiber port.
  • the target direction may also be a direction away from the device 10, at this time, the optical fiber port close to the device 10 is the first optical fiber port, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fiber port Target signal order b1 11111 2 b2 11101 2 b3 11011 2 b4 10111 2 b5 11001 2 b6 10011 2 b7 10101 2 b8 10001 2 c1 11111 1 c2 11101 1 c3 11011 1 c4 10111 1 c5 11001 1 c6 10011 1 c7 10101 1 c8 10001 1
  • the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port of the order 1 on the optical fiber link a1 is 11111
  • the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port of the order 2 on the optical fiber link a1 is 11111.
  • the first device can compare the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port of the order 1 on the optical fiber link a1 with the target signal of the optical fiber ports c1 to c8 corresponding to the order 1 in Table 2; and compare the order on the optical fiber link a1
  • the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port of 2 is compared with the target signal of the optical fiber ports b1 to b8 corresponding to order 2 in Table 2.
  • the arrangement law reflected by the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port with the order of 1 on the optical fiber link a1 is the same as the arrangement law indicated by the target signal 11111 of the optical fiber port c1, so the optical fiber link can be determined
  • the fiber port with order 1 on a1 is the fiber port c1.
  • the arrangement law reflected by the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port with order 2 on the optical fiber link a1 is the same as the arrangement law indicated by the target signal 11111 of the optical fiber port b1. Therefore, it can be determined that the order on the optical fiber link a1 is The fiber port of 2 is fiber port b1. Therefore, in S7502, the first device can determine that in the direction close to device 10, the first fiber port on the fiber link a1 is c1, and the second fiber port is b1, thereby realizing the connection to the fiber link a1. Identification of fiber ports.
  • the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link can be determined according to the encoded signal from the optical fiber link, and then the optical fiber port can be identified according to the arrangement rule.
  • a plurality of optical fiber ports are provided on an optical fiber link, and a dimming unit corresponding to the plurality of optical fiber ports is taken as an example.
  • only one fiber port and a dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port may be provided on the fiber link.
  • the arrangement rules of the corresponding dimming units are different.
  • the first device can identify the fiber port based on the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port.
  • the link detection of the communication system with more optical fiber links and optical fiber ports is realized, thereby It can be applied to more complicated communication systems.
  • the parameters of each dimming unit are the same. Therefore, there is no need to set multiple dimming units with different parameters on the optical fiber link; the wavelength of the signal in the first band emitted by the device can be less. (Such as unique), so that the device does not need to send out multiple signals of different wavelengths.
  • the communication system provided based on the embodiment of the present application can realize the identification of the optical fiber port. Further, based on the identification result of the optical fiber port, it can be determined whether the optical fiber port connected to the device is correct.
  • the related art provides a method for judging whether the optical fiber port connected to the device is correct by using a detection device, but this method requires additional detection devices, which is less flexible; however, in the embodiment of the present application, no additional detection devices are required, which is flexible. High sex.
  • the related technology also provides a way to use paper tags, electronic identification (eID) or radio frequency identification (radio frequency identification, RFID) technology as the label identification of the optical fiber port.
  • the label on the fiber port identifies the fiber port.
  • the manual error rate is high and the efficiency is low.
  • the device can automatically recognize the optical fiber port without manual participation, which improves the degree of automation and the identification efficiency of the optical fiber port, and reduces the error rate.
  • the first device can refer to the port identification method shown in FIG. 5 to identify the ports on each optical fiber link in the communication system in turn, and generate the communication system based on the identified ports on each link Topological diagram.
  • the coded signal received by the first device from the first optical fiber link is sent by the second device as an example.
  • the port identification method may not include operations performed by the second device, such as S102, S103, and S104, and the first device needs to send signals in the first band to the first optical fiber link before S105, and receive the first optical fiber link.
  • the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on an optical fiber link, and the received signal is used as the above-mentioned encoded signal.
  • the wavelength of the coded signal may be in the first waveband
  • the second device may not include the first sending module 601 and the circulator 603 in FIG. 6, and the structure of the first device may refer to FIG. 6.
  • the processing module 605 may control the first sending module 601 to send the signal in the first band to the circulator 603, and then the circulator 603 sends the signal to the filter 602 sends the signal from the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 sends the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link.
  • the filter 602 receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, and sends the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator 603, and then the circulator 603 The encoded signal from the filter 602 is sent to the processing module 605.
  • the first device when the first device needs to transmit data to the second device, the first device can send the data signal carrying the data to the second device through the first optical fiber link according to the data that needs to be transmitted (belonging to the data signal outside the first band). Signal).
  • the processing module 605 can control the second sending module 604 to send the data signal to the filter 602 according to the data to be transmitted, so that the filter 602 sends the data signal to the second device through the first optical fiber link.
  • the multiple optical fiber links in the communication system are independent of each other as an example.
  • the multiple optical fiber links may also overlap.
  • the multiple optical fiber links are formed after multiple branches are connected in a cascaded manner.
  • the device 10 is connected to a multi-level branch.
  • Each level of the multi-level branch includes multiple branches.
  • the multi-level branch includes the first-level branch and Take the second level branch, and each level of branch includes 8 branches as an example.
  • the first-level branch includes: branch a11 to branch a18
  • the second-level branch includes: branch a21 to branch a28, branch a31 to branch a38, branch a41 to branch a48, branch A51 to branch a58, branch a61 to branch a68, branch a71 to branch a78, branch a81 to branch a88, and branch a91 to branch a98.
  • each first-level branch is connected to the device 10, and each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches, and the next-level branches connected to different branches are different.
  • each branch (first-level branch) from branch a11 to branch a18 is connected to 8 second-level branches, and branch a11 to branch a18 are connected to the second-level branch
  • the branches are different.
  • the eight second-level branches connected by branch a11 include: branch a21 to branch a28; the eight second-level branches connected by branch a12 include: branch a31 to branch a38; branch a31 is connected
  • the 8 second-level branches include: branch a41 to branch a48; the 8 second-level branches connected by branch a41 include: branch a51 to branch a58; the 8 second-level branches connected by branch a51
  • Branch roads include: branch a61 to branch a68; the eight second-level branches connected by branch a61 include: branch a71 to branch a78; the eight second-level branches connected by branch a71 include: branch A81 to branch a88; the 8 second-level branches connected by branch a81 include: branch a91 to branch a98.
  • each branch in the communication system may be connected by a splitter as shown in FIG. 8.
  • Each optical fiber link in the communication system includes: one branch of each level of the above-mentioned multi-level branch.
  • branch a11 and branch a21 can be used to form an optical fiber link
  • branch a11 and branch a28 can be used to form an optical fiber link
  • each of the first-level branch in Figure 8 and The 8 second-level branches connected are used to form a total of 8 optical fiber links
  • the two-level branches in Figure 8 are used to form a total of 64 optical fiber links.
  • the branch can be connected to one device, and the devices connected to different last-level branches may be the same or different.
  • the last level branch is the second level branch.
  • 64 second level branches are connected to 64 devices one-to-one.
  • the 64 devices include: device 11 to device 18, and device 21 To device 28, device 31 to device 38, device 41 to device 48, device 51 to device 58, device 61 to device 68, device 71 to device 78, and device 81 to device 88.
  • the devices connected to the different last-level branches can also be the same.
  • all the second-level branches in FIG. 8 can also be connected to the device 11 (not shown in FIG. 8).
  • each optical fiber link in the communication system may be provided with an optical fiber port and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different.
  • the optical fiber ports provided on the optical fiber links include: the optical fiber ports of each branch in the optical fiber link that are close to the equipment connected to the first branch.
  • the optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link where the branch a11 and the branch a21 are located include: the optical fiber port b1 on the branch a11 close to the device 10 and the optical fiber port c21 on the branch a21 close to the device 10.
  • the communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a passive optical network (PON) system or other communication system, as long as the communication system includes devices connected through multiple optical fiber links.
  • PON passive optical network
  • the equipment in the communication system may include: equipment connected through multiple optical fiber links in the PON system, such as an OLT and multiple ONTs.
  • each optical fiber link is independent of each other, by setting multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port on each of the multiple optical fiber links, In order to realize the identification of the fiber port on the fiber link and the fault detection of the fiber link.
  • Multiple dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link can be arranged near the optical fiber port.
  • the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port and the fiber port is less than the distance threshold, and when the fiber link is provided with multiple fiber ports, the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port and other fiber ports is greater than or equal to Distance threshold.
  • the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port a21 include: The five dimming units of the fiber port a21, and the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c28 include: 4 dimming units on the branch a28 close to the fiber port c28.
  • At least part of the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located.
  • the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located.
  • the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located, and another part of the dimming unit is located outside the branch.
  • multiple first-level branches are connected to the first device through the initial branch a0.
  • each dimming unit can be corresponding to multiple A part of the dimming unit (such as 4 dimming units) is set on the branch where the optical fiber port is located, and another part of the dimming unit (such as 1 dimming unit) is set on the branch where the optical fiber port is connected.
  • the branch connected to the optical fiber port on the first-level branch is the initial branch
  • the branch connected to the optical fiber port on the non-first-level branch is the previous branch of the branch.
  • Each optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port, and the plurality of target positions are arranged at equal intervals; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged at least part of the corresponding optical fiber port At the target position, and the at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position corresponding to the optical fiber port.
  • the arrangement rules of dimming units on different optical fiber links in multiple optical fiber links are different. As shown in Figure 8, the arrangement of the dimming units on the 64 optical fiber links is different from each other. For example, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on different first-level branches are different, and the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to the same branch are different. For example, as shown in Figure 8, the eight optical fiber ports b1 to b8 on the eight first-level branches a11 to a18 have different arrangements of dimming units, for example, the arrangement of dimming units corresponding to b1 It can be expressed as 11111, and the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to b2 can be expressed as 11101.
  • the arrangement of the dimming units corresponding to the eight fiber ports c21 to c28 on the second-level branch a21 to a28 is different.
  • the arrangement of the dimming unit corresponding to c21 can be expressed as 11111
  • the dimming unit corresponding to c28 The arrangement rule of can be expressed as 11101. It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port has a unique arrangement rule. Therefore, the optical fiber port identification or fault detection of the optical fiber link can be realized based on the arrangement rule.
  • the distance between different dimming units corresponding to the same optical fiber port on the optical fiber link is small, and the optical fiber chain The distance between different dimming units corresponding to different fiber ports on the road is relatively large.
  • the distance between the five dimming units corresponding to fiber port b1 is relatively small, but the five dimming units corresponding to fiber port b1 on the optical fiber link The distance between the light unit and the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c21 is relatively large.
  • dimming unit in the embodiment of the present application reference may be made to the dimming unit in the embodiment where multiple optical fiber links are independent of each other, and details are not described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application Based on the communication system in which each optical fiber link provided by the embodiment of the present application overlaps (the communication system shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9), the embodiment of the present application provides an optical fiber port identification method for the communication system .
  • the optical fiber port identification method can refer to the optical fiber port identification method shown in FIG. Signal to identify the fiber port on the first fiber link.
  • the process in which the first device recognizes the fiber port on the first fiber link is different from the process in which the first device recognizes the fiber port on the first fiber link in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the first device needs to determine the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port before identifying the optical fiber ports on the first optical fiber link.
  • the port group corresponding to the fiber port on each level 1 branch includes: the fiber port;
  • the port group corresponding to the fiber port on each level i branch includes: the fiber port and the front i connected to the fiber port -1 fiber port on the branch, i ⁇ 2.
  • the first device When the first device recognizes the fiber port on the first fiber link, it can combine the detection sub-signals of the first j fiber ports on the first fiber link close to the first device to the port group corresponding to each fiber port
  • the target signal is compared.
  • the target signal of the port group corresponding to each fiber port may be formed by sequentially arranging the target signals of each fiber port in the port group according to the arrangement order of the fiber ports.
  • the first device may recognize the j-th optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link that is close to the first device as the second optical fiber port.
  • the second optical fiber port is any optical fiber port on multiple optical fiber links.
  • the target signal of each fiber port shown in FIG. 8 can all be as shown in Table 3. It should be noted that some fiber ports in Figure 8 are indicated by ellipses and are not shown. Table 3 does not show the target signals of these fiber ports, the port groups corresponding to these fiber ports, and the target signals of these port groups. .
  • Fiber port Target signal of fiber port Port group Target signal of the port group b1 11111 b1 11111 b2 11101 b2 11101 b3 11011 b3 11011 b4 11001 b4 11001 b5 10111 b5 10111 b6 11101 b6 11101 b7 10011 b7 10011 b8 10001 b8 10001 c21 11111 b1, c21 1111111111 c28 11101 b1, c28 1111111101 c31 11101 b2, c31 1110111101 c38 11011 b2, c38 1110111011 c41 11011 b3, c41 1101111011 c48 11001 b3, c48 1101111001 c51 11001 b4, c51 1100111001 c58 10111 b4, c58 1100110111
  • the first optical fiber link includes: an initial branch a0, a branch a11, and a branch a21
  • the first device is the device 10
  • the second device is the device 11.
  • the timing diagram of the encoded signal is also shown in Figure 7, it can be known from S1051 that the detection sub-signal corresponding to the first optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link close to the device 10 is 11111, and the first optical fiber link close to the device 10
  • the detection sub-signal corresponding to the second fiber port of is 11111.
  • the first device may compare the detection sub-signal corresponding to the first optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link close to the device 10 with the target signal of each port group in Table 3; and the first optical fiber link close to the device 10
  • the detection sub-signals corresponding to the first two optical fiber ports are also compared with the target signals of each port group in Table 3.
  • the arrangement rule reflected by the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the first optical fiber port close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link and the arrangement rule indicated by the target signal 11111 of the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port b1 The same, therefore, it can be determined that the first optical fiber port close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link is the optical fiber port b1.
  • the arrangement rule reflected by the detection sub-signals 1111111111 corresponding to the first two optical fiber ports close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link, and the arrangement indicated by the target signal 1111111111 of the port group (b1, c21) corresponding to the optical fiber port c21 The rule is the same, so it can be determined that the second optical fiber port close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link is the optical fiber port c21. Thus, the identification of the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link is realized.
  • the first device may also obtain the reference signal of each optical fiber link among the multiple optical fiber links, and perform a calculation on the first device according to the reference signal of the multiple optical fiber links and the encoded signal.
  • a fiber link performs fault detection.
  • the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link.
  • the reference signal of each optical fiber link in the communication system can be as shown in Table 4.
  • the first device can adjust the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the above-mentioned coded signal Compare with the arrangement rule indicated by each reference signal. It should be noted that if the first optical fiber link is not faulty, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the coded signal will be the same as the arrangement rule indicated by a reference signal in Table 4. If the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement rule indicated by all reference signals, the first device can determine that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
  • the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1
  • a part of the optical fiber link a1 between the two dimming units is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal
  • the signal is sent by the device 11 in FIG. 10, and the device 11 can send an encoded signal to the device 10 according to the signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1.
  • the signals in the first band sent by the device 11 can only be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c1, but cannot be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port b1.
  • Light unit is described in Figure 10, suppose that the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1, and a part of the optical fiber link a1 between the two dimming units is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal;
  • the signal is sent by the device 11 in FIG. 10, and the device 11 can send an encoded signal to the device 10 according to the signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1. Because the faulty part of the optical fiber link a
  • the coded signal sent by the device 11 reflects the arrangement rule of the five dimming units corresponding to the port c1, and the coded signal sent by the device 11 cannot be transmitted to the device 10 either. Therefore, because the device 10 cannot receive any signal, it can be considered that the received coded signal is 0000000000, and the coded signal is used to indicate that no dimming unit is arranged on the optical fiber link a1.
  • the coded signal is different from each reference signal in Table 4, so the first device can determine that the optical fiber link a1 is faulty.
  • the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1
  • this part cannot transmit any signal
  • the signal of is sent by the device 10 in FIG. 10, and the device 10 can receive the encoded signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1. Since the faulty part of the optical fiber link a1 cannot transmit signals, the signals in the first band sent by the device 10 can only be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port b1, but cannot be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c1.
  • Light unit
  • the coded signal received by the device 10 is 1111100000, which reflects the arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the port b1.
  • the coded signal is different from each reference signal in Table 4, so the first device can determine that the optical fiber link a1 is faulty.
  • the first device may also determine the faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
  • the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1
  • the signal in the first band is determined by The device 10 in FIG. 10 sends out, and the device 10 can receive the encoded signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1.
  • the coded signal received by the device 10 is 1111100000, which reflects the arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the port b1.
  • the coded signal has the highest similarity with the reference signal 11111111111 corresponding to the fiber link a1, and the device 10 can determine the fifth tone on the fiber link a1 that is close to the device 10
  • the link section between the optical unit and the sixth dimming unit is faulty.
  • the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1
  • the third dimming unit and the fourth dimming unit near port b1 Part of the optical unit is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal
  • the signal in the first band is sent by the device 10 in FIG. 11, and the device 10 can receive the encoded signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1. Therefore, the signal in the first band sent by the device 10 can only be transmitted to the first three dimming units close to the port b1, but cannot be transmitted to the last two dimming units close to the port b1, and the five dimming units corresponding to the port c1. unit.
  • the coded signal received by the device 10 is 1110000000. Comparing the coded signal with the reference signal in Table 4 shows that the coded signal has the highest similarity with the reference signal 11111111111 corresponding to the fiber link a1, and the device 10 can determine the fiber link The link segment between the third dimming unit and the fourth dimming unit in a1 is faulty.
  • the reference signal of each optical fiber link shown in FIG. 9 may be as shown in Table 5.
  • the arrangement rule is compared with the arrangement rule indicated by each reference signal. It should be noted that if the first optical fiber link is not faulty, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the coded signal will be the same as the arrangement rule indicated by a reference signal in Table 5. If the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement rule indicated by all reference signals, the first device can determine that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
  • the first optical fiber link includes branch a0, branch a11, and branch a21, and two parts of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link (the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port b1 and the fiber
  • the part of the dimming unit corresponding to port c21 is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal;
  • the signal in the first band is sent by the device 11 in FIG. 12, and the device 11 can dimming according to the first optical fiber link
  • the signal reflected by the unit sends an encoded signal to the device 10.
  • the signals in the first band sent by device 11 can only be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c21, but cannot be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port b1.
  • the coded signal sent by the device 11 reflects the arrangement of the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c21, and the coded signal sent by the device 11 cannot be transmitted to the device 10. Therefore, because the device 10 cannot receive any signal, it can be regarded as receiving
  • the obtained coded signal is 0000000000, which is used to indicate that no dimming unit is arranged on the first optical fiber link.
  • the coded signal is different from each reference signal in Table 5, so the first device can determine that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
  • the first device may also determine the faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
  • the first optical fiber link includes branch a0, branch a11, and branch a21, and there are two parts of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link (the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port b1 and the fiber port c21.
  • the part of the corresponding dimming unit) is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal; the signal in the first band is sent by the device 11 in FIG. 12, and the device 11 can reflect on the dimming unit according to the first optical fiber link.
  • the signal sends an encoded signal to the device 10.
  • the coded signal received by the device 10 is 0000000000. If devices 11 to 18 have all sent coded signals to device 10, and these coded signals are all 0000000000, then device 10 can determine the common link segment (support Road a11) failure.
  • the first optical fiber link includes branch a0, branch a11, and branch a21, and a certain part of branch a21 is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal; the signal in the first band is determined by The device 11 in FIG. 13 sends out, and the device 11 can send an encoded signal to the device 10 according to the signal reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
  • the coded signal received by the device 10 is 0000000000. If the device 18 also sends an encoded signal to the device 10, and the encoded signal sent by the device 18 is 1111111101, the encoded signal is the same as the reference signal 1111111101 in Table 5.
  • the device 10 can determine that the optical fiber link where the branch a0, the branch a11, and the branch a28 are located is not faulty, but the optical fiber link where the branch a0, the branch a11, and the branch a21 are located is faulty, and then the branch can be determined Road a21 is the faulty link segment.
  • each dimming unit on the optical fiber link can reflect the signal of the first band.
  • the optical fiber link fails, at least part of the dimming unit cannot reflect the first waveband signal.
  • the coded signal from the optical fiber link can reflect the reflection of the signal in the first band by the dimming unit of the optical fiber link. Therefore, the first device can determine whether the optical fiber link is faulty based on the coded signal and locate the optical fiber link. The faulty link segment, so as to realize the fault detection of the optical fiber link.
  • the related technology provides a method for fault detection of optical fiber links by using "dark optical fibers".
  • This method requires a dark optical fiber to be set near the optical fiber link, and the dark optical fiber is not connected to any equipment.
  • the staff can test the performance of the dark optical fiber to determine whether the dark optical fiber is faulty.
  • it is determined that the dark optical fiber is faulty it is determined that the optical fiber link is faulty.
  • setting a dark fiber will take up a certain amount of fiber resources, which cannot be applied in areas with relatively tight fiber resources, and requires staff to perform performance tests on the dark fiber. Therefore, the degree of automation is low, the error rate is high, and the efficiency is low.
  • the device can automatically perform fault detection on the optical fiber link, with a high degree of automation, high accuracy, and high efficiency, and there is no need to set a dark optical fiber, which avoids the waste of optical fiber resources.
  • optical fiber links in the embodiments of the present application are connected to devices.
  • the optical fiber links are located outside the connected devices, and the dimming unit provided on the optical fiber links is also located outside the device as an example.
  • a part of the optical fiber link may extend into the connected device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the dimming unit provided on the optical fiber link may be located inside or outside the device connected to the optical fiber link, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • optical fiber port identification device which can be used for the first device in the communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the optical fiber port identification device includes:
  • the processing module 605 is used to obtain the target signal of the fiber port on each fiber link in the multiple fiber links, and the target signal of the fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port on the fiber link ;
  • the receiving module 609 is used to receive the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link.
  • the multiple optical fiber links include the first optical fiber link.
  • the encoded signal is reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link after the signal in the first waveband is reflected get;
  • the processing module 605 is further configured to identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  • a plurality of optical fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than the distance threshold.
  • the distance of other optical fiber ports is greater than or equal to the distance threshold; the processing module 605 is used to: determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein, the detection sub-signal is determined by the multiple corresponding to each optical fiber port.
  • a dimming unit is obtained after reflecting the signal in the first waveband; according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, the first optical fiber link On the fiber port to identify it.
  • the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged on at least a part of the plurality of target positions, And at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position among the multiple target positions; the processing module 605 is configured to: determine the corresponding target position in the coded signal according to the unit duration and the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port The detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link; wherein the unit time length is: the time required for the signal in the first band to be transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the multiple target positions.
  • the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports in the same order on different fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: a direction close to or away from the first device; the optical fiber port identification device further includes: Determine the order corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  • the corresponding order of the optical fiber ports is: in the target direction, the order of the optical fiber ports among the multiple optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link; the processing module 605 is used for : In the target direction, if the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port of the target order on the first optical fiber link is the same as the arrangement of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first optical fiber port If the distribution rules are consistent, the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link is identified as the first optical fiber port, and the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
  • the first device is connected with multiple branches, and each branch includes multiple branches; each first-level branch is connected to the first device, and each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches
  • the next level of branches connected to different branches is different;
  • the optical fiber link includes: one branch of each level of the multi-level branch;
  • the optical fiber port set on the optical fiber link includes: each level of branch is close to The optical fiber port of the first device;
  • the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on the different first-level branches are different, and the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to the same branch are different;
  • the identification device further includes: determining the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch includes: the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch; each i-th level branch
  • the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on the road includes: the optical fiber port on each i-th branch, and the optical fiber port
  • the first device is connected to the second device through a first optical fiber link
  • the receiving module 609 is configured to: receive an encoded signal sent by the second device through the first optical fiber link; where the encoded signal is: the second device is in The signal sent after sending the signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, the dimming unit is also used to transmit the signal outside the first waveband, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first waveband.
  • the optical fiber port identification device further includes: a first sending module 601 configured to send a signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link.
  • the processing module 605 is further configured to: determine the reference signal of each optical fiber link, and the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link; When the arrangement rule of the dimming unit is different from the arrangement rule indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, it is determined that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
  • the processing module 605 is further configured to determine the faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
  • the bandwidth of the first waveband ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the absolute value of the difference between the wavelength of the signal in the first waveband and the center wavelength of the first waveband is less than or equal to 5 nanometers.
  • the structure of the optical fiber port identification device may be as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the receiving module 609 includes: a filter 602 and a circulator 603 in FIG. 6;
  • the module 605 is respectively connected to the first sending module 601 and the circulator 603, the circulator 603 is connected to the filter 602 and the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 is connected to the first optical fiber link;
  • the processing module 605 is used to control the first sending module 601 to
  • the circulator 603 transmits the signal of the first band;
  • the circulator 603 is used to transmit the signal from the first transmitting module 601 to the filter 602, and the filter 602 is used to transmit the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link;
  • 602 is used to receive the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link and send the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator 603;
  • the circulator 603 is used to send the encoded signal from the filter 601 to the processing module 605.
  • the optical fiber port identification device includes:
  • the first sending module 601 is configured to send signals in the first band to the first optical fiber link;
  • the receiving module 609 is configured to receive the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link;
  • the second sending module 604 is configured to send an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link according to the signal received from the first optical fiber link, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first wavelength band.
  • the structure of the optical fiber port identification device may be as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the receiving module 609 includes: the filter 602 and the circulator 603 in FIG. 6; the optical fiber port identification device also includes The processing module 605 is connected to the first sending module 601, the second sending module 604, and the circulator 603, respectively, the circulator 603 connects the filter 602 and the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 connects the second sending module 604 and the first sending module 604.
  • the processing module 605 is used to control the first sending module 601 to send signals of the first band to the circulator 603; the circulator 603 is used to send signals from the first sending module 601 to the filter 602; the filter 602 is used To send the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link; the filter 602 is used to receive the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link, and to send the signal from the first optical fiber to the circulator 603
  • the signal of the link; the circulator 603 is used to send the signal from the filter 602 to the processing module 605; the processing module 605 is used to control the second sending module 604 to send the encoded signal to the filter 602 according to the signal from the circulator 603;
  • the converter 602 is configured to send the signal from the second sending module 604 to the first optical fiber link.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the network device may be any device in the communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application (such as the first device or the second device mentioned above).
  • the network device 200 includes a processor 202 and a memory 201, where the memory 201 is used to store programs, and the processor 202 is used to call the programs stored in the memory 201, so that the network device executes corresponding methods. Or function.
  • the network device 200 may further include at least one communication interface 203 and at least one communication bus 204.
  • the memory 201, the processor 202, and the communication interface 203 are communicatively connected through a communication bus 204.
  • the communication interface 203 is used to communicate with other devices under the control of the processor 202, and the processor 202 can call a program stored in the memory 201 through the communication bus 204.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program is executed by a processor, any optical fiber port identification method provided in the embodiment of the present application is implemented.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions.
  • the computer program product runs on a network device, the network device executes any of the optical fiber port identification methods provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software it may be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part, and the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data.
  • the center transmits to another website, computer, server, or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium, or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state hard disk).
  • first and second are only used for descriptive purposes, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance.
  • the term “at least one” refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more, unless expressly defined otherwise.
  • the disclosed system, equipment, device, etc. may be implemented in other structural manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or integrated. To another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components described as units may or may not be physical units, and may be located in one place or distributed to multiple network devices (such as terminal devices). )superior. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Optical Communication System (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of optical fiber communications. Disclosed are an optical fiber port identification method and apparatus, a communication system, and a network device. An optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port and multiple dimming units, and arrangement laws of dimming units on different optical fiber links are different. The dimming unit is used for reflecting a signal in a first wave band. The method comprises: after obtaining a target signal of an optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, a first device identifies an optical fiber port on a first optical fiber link according to an encoding signal from the first optical fiber link and the obtained target signal. The target signal of the optical fiber port is used for indicating: the arrangement rules of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link. The encoding signal is obtained after the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link reflects a signal in a first wave band. The present application can be suitable for identifying an optical fiber port of a relatively complex optical fiber link, and is used in a communication system.

Description

光纤端口识别方法及装置、通信系统、网络设备Optical fiber port identification method and device, communication system and network equipment
本申请要求于2020年3月17日提交的申请号为202010188685.2、发明名称为“光纤端口识别方法及装置、通信系统、网络设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on March 17, 2020 with the application number 202010188685. 2, and the invention titled "Optical fiber port identification method and device, communication system, network equipment", the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference Applying.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及光纤通信技术领域,特别涉及一种光纤端口识别方法及装置、通信系统、网络设备。This application relates to the field of optical fiber communication technology, and in particular to an optical fiber port identification method and device, communication system, and network equipment.
背景技术Background technique
通信系统通常包括多条光纤链路,以及连接至光纤链路的设备,通信系统中的设备能够通过连接的光纤链路进行通信。A communication system usually includes multiple optical fiber links and devices connected to the optical fiber links, and the devices in the communication system can communicate through the connected optical fiber links.
通信系统中的光纤链路往往较为复杂,且每条光纤链路上的光纤端口也较多。因此,往往需要对光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,以准确地将设备连接至相应地光纤链路。Optical fiber links in communication systems are often more complicated, and there are more optical fiber ports on each optical fiber link. Therefore, it is often necessary to identify the fiber port on the fiber link to accurately connect the device to the corresponding fiber link.
目前亟需一种适用于较为复杂的光纤链路的光纤端口识别方法。There is an urgent need for an optical fiber port identification method suitable for more complex optical fiber links.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种光纤端口识别方法及装置、通信系统、网络设备,能够适用于较为复杂的光纤链路的光纤端口的识别,所述技术方案如下:This application provides an optical fiber port identification method and device, a communication system, and network equipment, which can be applied to the identification of optical fiber ports of relatively complex optical fiber links. The technical solutions are as follows:
第一方面,提供了一种光纤端口识别方法,用于第一设备,所述第一设备连接有多条光纤链路。该光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及该光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;光纤链路上的调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,且光纤链路上所有调光单元对第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1。In a first aspect, a method for identifying an optical fiber port is provided for a first device, and the first device is connected to a plurality of optical fiber links. The optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different; the dimming unit on the optical fiber link is used for reflection The signal in the first waveband, and the sum of the reflectivity of all the dimming units on the optical fiber link to the signal in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1.
所述方法包括:第一设备在获取每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号后,根据来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,以及获取到的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。其中,光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:该光纤端口对应的调光单元在光纤链路上的排布规律,上述多条光纤链路包括第一光纤链路,来自第一光纤链路的编码信号由第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射第一波段内的信号后得到。The method includes: after the first device obtains the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, according to the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link and the obtained target signal, Optical fiber port for identification. Wherein, the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link, and the multiple optical fiber links include the first optical fiber link, and the code from the first optical fiber link The signal is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first waveband by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
本申请实施例提供的端口识别方法中,由于光纤链路上设置有光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同。因此,可以根据来自光纤链路的编码信号确定光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律,进而根据该排布规律对光纤端口进行识别。并且,本申请实施例中无需改变通信系统的基础架构,仅对通信系统中的部分结构进行轻微的更改,减小了改进成本,降低了工程实施的复杂度,从而方便后期的管理维护。In the port identification method provided by the embodiment of the present application, since multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and the arrangement rules of the dimming units on different optical fiber links are different. Therefore, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link can be determined according to the encoded signal from the optical fiber link, and then the optical fiber port can be identified according to the arrangement rule. Moreover, in the embodiments of the present application, there is no need to change the basic structure of the communication system, and only minor changes are made to part of the structure of the communication system, which reduces the cost of improvement and the complexity of project implementation, thereby facilitating subsequent management and maintenance.
另外,本申请实施例中,由于能够通过增加调光单元的排布方式,增加能够检测的光纤端口的数量,实现了对光纤链路和光纤端口均较多的通信系统的链路检测,从而能够适用于较为复杂的通信系统。并且,在本申请实施例中,各个调光单元的参数一致,因此,也无需在光纤链路上设置多种不同参数的调光单元;设备发出的第一波段内的信号的波长可以较少 (比如唯一),使得设备无需发出多种不同波长的信号。本申请实施例中,设备能够自动实现对光纤端口的识别,无需人工参与,提高了自动化程度以及光纤端口的识别效率,减小了错误率。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, since the number of optical fiber ports that can be detected can be increased by increasing the arrangement of the dimming unit, the link detection of the communication system with more optical fiber links and optical fiber ports is realized, thereby It can be applied to more complicated communication systems. Moreover, in the embodiments of the present application, the parameters of each dimming unit are the same. Therefore, there is no need to set multiple dimming units with different parameters on the optical fiber link; the wavelength of the signal in the first band emitted by the device can be less. (Such as unique), so that the device does not need to send out multiple signals of different wavelengths. In the embodiment of the present application, the device can automatically realize the recognition of the optical fiber port without manual participation, which improves the degree of automation and the recognition efficiency of the optical fiber port, and reduces the error rate.
可选地,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律包括:所述光纤链路上所述调光单元的个数,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的位置,以及所述光纤链路上相邻所述调光单元的间隔中的至少一种。本申请实施例中以该排布规律包括:光纤链路上调光单元的个数,调光单元在光纤链路上的位置,以及光纤链路上相邻调光单元的间隔为例。Optionally, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link includes: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link At least one of the position and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link. In the embodiment of the present application, the arrangement rule includes: the number of dimming units on the optical fiber link, the position of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the interval between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link as an example.
可选地,所述光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与所述每个光纤端口的距离小于距离阈值,且与所述多个光纤端口中除所述每个光纤端口之外的其他光纤端口的距离大于或等于距离阈值;在根据所述编码信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别时,第一设备可以首先确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;之后,第一设备再根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。其中,所述检测子信号由所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元反射所述第一波段内的信号后得到。Optionally, the optical fiber link is provided with a plurality of optical fiber ports, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold, and is divided by the plurality of optical fiber ports. The distance of the other optical fiber ports other than each optical fiber port is greater than or equal to the distance threshold; according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, the distance between the optical fiber ports on the first optical fiber link When identifying the optical fiber port of the first optical fiber link, the first device may first determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; The detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the upper and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link. Wherein, the detection sub-signal is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first waveband by the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port.
可选地,所述光纤链路上具有所述每个光纤端口对应的等间距排布的多个目标位置;所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元设置在所述多个目标位置中的至少部分目标位置上,且所述至少部分目标位置包括:所述多个目标位置中的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置;第一设备在确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号时,可以根据单位时长以及所述每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量,确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,所述单位时长为:所述第一波段内的信号在所述多个目标位置中相邻目标位置间的光纤链路上传输所需的时长。Optionally, the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged in the plurality of In at least part of the target positions, and the at least part of the target positions includes: the first target position and the last target position in the plurality of target positions; When detecting the sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, it may be determined that the coded signal corresponds to the first optical fiber link according to the unit time length and the number of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port. The detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port; wherein the unit time length is: the time required for the signal in the first waveband to be transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the multiple target positions.
示例地,假设上述每个光纤端口对应5个目标位置,则第一设备在识别编码信号中对应第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号时,可以首先对编码信号进行第一个周期的检测。示例地,在每个周期的检测中,第一设备首先检测接收到的编码信号中的第一个高电位。在检测到该第一个高电位后,第一设备可以对该编码信号中每隔单位时长的位置进行一次检测,并在第四次检测之后停止检测。在每次检测的过程中,第一设备需要确定该编码信号在当前时刻的电位为高电位还是低电位,在该第四次检测之后第一设备可以根据检测到的第一个高电位,以及这四次检测的结果,生成第一个光纤端口对应的调光单元所对应的检测子信号。需要说明的是,第一设备对编码信号中每隔单位时长的位置进行检测的次数可以比每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量小1;本申请中以每个光纤端口对应的5个目标位置为例,因此对编码信号中每隔单位时长的位置进行检测的次数为4。之后,在上述第一个周期的检测结束后,第一设备可以继续对该编码信号进行第二个周期的检测,以得到第二个光纤端口对应的调光单元所对应的检测子信号。需要说明的是,在该第二个周期的检测结束后,第一设备仍然可以继续对编码信号进行更多周期的检测,直至将该编码信号全部检测完毕。For example, assuming that each of the above-mentioned optical fiber ports corresponds to 5 target positions, the first device may first perform the first detection on the encoded signal when identifying the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal. Periodic detection. Exemplarily, in each cycle of detection, the first device first detects the first high potential in the received encoded signal. After detecting the first high potential, the first device may detect the position of the coded signal every unit time, and stop the detection after the fourth detection. In the process of each detection, the first device needs to determine whether the potential of the encoded signal at the current moment is a high potential or a low potential. After the fourth detection, the first device can detect the first high potential according to the first detection, and As a result of these four detections, the detection sub-signal corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the first fiber port is generated. It should be noted that the number of times that the first device detects positions in the coded signal every unit time may be one less than the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port; in this application, 5 targets corresponding to each fiber port are used. The position is taken as an example, so the number of times of detecting the position every unit duration in the coded signal is 4. After that, after the detection of the first cycle is completed, the first device may continue to detect the encoded signal for the second cycle to obtain the detection sub-signal corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the second optical fiber port. It should be noted that after the detection of the second cycle ends, the first device can still continue to perform more cycles of detection of the encoded signal until the entire detection of the encoded signal is completed.
可选地,当各个光纤链路相互独立时,在目标方向上,不同光纤链路上相同次序的光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,所述目标方向包括:靠近或远离所述第一设备的方向;所述方法还包括:确定所述每条光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的次序,所述光纤端口对应的次序为:在所述目标方向上,所述光纤端口在所在的光纤链路上的多个光纤端口中的次序; 第一设备在根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别时,在所述目标方向上,若所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口对应的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第一光纤端口的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致,则第一设备可以将所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口识别为所述第一光纤端口,所述第一光纤端口为对应所述目标次序的任一光纤端口。Optionally, when the respective optical fiber links are independent of each other, in the target direction, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the same order of optical fiber ports on different optical fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: approaching or farther away from the The direction of the first device; the method further includes: determining the sequence corresponding to each fiber port on each fiber link, the sequence corresponding to the fiber port is: in the target direction, the fiber port is in The sequence of the multiple optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link; the first device detects the sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link. The target signal, when identifying the fiber port on the first fiber link, in the target direction, if the dimming reflected by the detection sub-signal corresponding to the fiber port of the target order on the first fiber link The arrangement rule of the unit is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first optical fiber port, and the first device can identify the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link as the first optical fiber link. An optical fiber port, and the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
可选地,当各个光纤链路存在交叠时,所述第一设备连接有多级支路,且每级支路包括多条支路;每条第1级支路与所述第一设备连接,每条支路与多条下一级支路连接,且不同支路连接的下一级支路不同;所述光纤链路包括:所述多级支路中每级支路中的一条支路;所述光纤链路上设置的光纤端口包括:每级支路上靠近所述第一设备的光纤端口;不同第1级支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,同一支路连接的多条支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同;所述方法还包括:确定每个光纤端口对应的端口组,其中,每个第1级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第1级支路上的光纤端口;每个第i级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口,以及所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口连接的前i-1级支路上的光纤端口,i≥2;第一设备在根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别时,若所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的前j个光纤端口的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第二光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致,则第一设备可以将所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的第j个光纤端口识别为所述第二光纤端口,所述第二光纤端口为所述多条光纤链路上的任一光纤端口。Optionally, when each optical fiber link overlaps, the first device is connected with multi-level branches, and each level of the branch includes multiple branches; each first-level branch is connected to the first device Connection, each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches, and the lower-level branches connected by different branches are different; the optical fiber link includes: one of the branches of each level in the multi-level branch Branch; the optical fiber ports set on the optical fiber link include: the optical fiber ports on each branch close to the first device; the arrangement of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on different first branch branches is different, and the same branch The arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to each other are different; the method further includes: determining the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein each optical fiber port on the first-level branch corresponds to The port group includes: the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch; the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each level i branch includes: the optical fiber port on each level i branch, and the each The optical fiber port on the first i-1 branch connected to the optical fiber port on the i-th branch, i≥2; the first device detects the sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and When the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link is used to identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, if the first j optical fibers on the first optical fiber link close to the first device The arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal of the port is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the port group corresponding to the second optical fiber port. The j-th optical fiber port on the optical fiber link that is close to the first device is identified as the second optical fiber port, and the second optical fiber port is any optical fiber port on the multiple optical fiber links.
可选地,当各个光纤链路存在交叠时,所述多条第1级支路均通过初始支路与所述第一设备连接;所述光纤端口对应的一部分调光单元位于所述光纤端口所在的支路上,所述光纤端口对应的另一部分调光单元位于所述光纤端口连接的支路上。Optionally, when each optical fiber link overlaps, the multiple first-level branches are all connected to the first device through the initial branch; a part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located in the optical fiber On the branch where the port is located, another part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located on the branch connected to the optical fiber port.
可选地,上述第一波段的信号可以是第二设备发送至第一光纤链路的。所述第一设备通过所述第一光纤链路连接至第二设备,所述接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,包括:接收所述第二设备通过所述第一光纤链路发送的所述编码信号;其中,所述编码信号为:所述第二设备在向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号后发送的信号,所述调光单元还用于透射所述第一波段外的信号,所述编码信号的波长位于所述第一波段外。Optionally, the foregoing first waveband signal may be sent by the second device to the first optical fiber link. The first device is connected to the second device via the first optical fiber link, and the receiving the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link includes: receiving the signal sent by the second device via the first optical fiber link The coded signal; wherein the coded signal is a signal sent by the second device after sending a signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, and the dimming unit is also used to transmit For signals outside the first waveband, the wavelength of the coded signal is outside the first waveband.
可选地,上述第一波段的信号可以是第一设备发送至第一光纤链路的。在所述接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号之前,所述方法还包括:向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号。Optionally, the foregoing first waveband signal may be sent by the first device to the first optical fiber link. Before the receiving the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, the method further includes: sending the signal in the first wavelength band to the first optical fiber link.
可选地,所述方法还包括:确定所述每条光纤链路的参考信号,所述光纤链路的参考信号用于指示:所述光纤链路上所有调光单元的排布规律;在所述编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与所述多条光纤链路的参考信号所指示的排布规律均不同时,确定所述第一光纤链路故障。Optionally, the method further includes: determining a reference signal of each optical fiber link, where the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link; When the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement rule indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, it is determined that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
可选地,在确定所述第一光纤链路故障之后,所述方法还包括:根据所述编码信号,确定所述第一光纤链路中故障的链路段。Optionally, after the failure of the first optical fiber link is determined, the method further includes: determining the failed link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
可选地,所述调光单元包括:光栅(如啁啾光纤布拉格光栅(chirped fiber bragg grating, CFBG))、半透半反膜等。Optionally, the dimming unit includes: a grating (such as a chirped fiber bragg grating (CFBG)), a semi-transparent and semi-reflective film, and the like.
可选地,所述第一波段的带宽的范围为2纳米至10纳米,和/或,所述第一波段的信号的波长与所述第一波段的中心波长之差的绝对值≤5纳米。这样一来,当第一波段的带宽较大,且第一波段的中心波长与第一波段的信号的波长较为相近时,即便是调光单元受到环境影响导致调光单元反射的波段的中心波长偏移,依然能够保证调光单元能够对第二设备发射的第一波段内的信号进行反射,避免了调光单元的功能受到环境影响。Optionally, the bandwidth of the first waveband ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the absolute value of the difference between the wavelength of the signal in the first waveband and the center wavelength of the first waveband is ≤ 5 nanometers . In this way, when the bandwidth of the first waveband is larger, and the center wavelength of the first waveband is close to the wavelength of the first waveband signal, even if the dimming unit is affected by the environment, the center wavelength of the waveband reflected by the dimming unit The offset can still ensure that the dimming unit can reflect the signal in the first waveband emitted by the second device, and avoid the function of the dimming unit from being affected by the environment.
第二方面,提供了一种光纤端口识别方法,用于第二设备,所述第二设备通过第一光纤链路连接至第一设备,所述第一设备连接有多条光纤链路,所述第一光纤链路为所述多条光纤链路中的任一光纤链路,所述光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及所述光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;所述调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,以及透射所述第一波段外的信号,且所述光纤链路上调光单元对所述第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1;所述方法包括:第二设备首先向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号,并接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号;之后,第二设备根据从所述第一光纤链路上接收到的信号,通过所述第一光纤链路向所述第一设备发送编码信号,所述编码信号的波长位于所述第一波段外。In a second aspect, an optical fiber port identification method is provided for a second device, the second device is connected to a first device through a first optical fiber link, and the first device is connected to a plurality of optical fiber links, so The first optical fiber link is any optical fiber link among the multiple optical fiber links, and the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port, and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port, and different optical fiber chains The arrangement rules of the dimming units on the road are different; the dimming units are used to reflect signals in the first waveband and transmit signals outside the first waveband, and the dimming unit pairs on the optical fiber link The sum of the reflectances of the signals in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1; the method includes: the second device first sends the signals in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, and receives the first optical fiber link. The signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link; after that, the second device transmits the signal to the first optical fiber link through the first optical fiber link according to the signal received from the first optical fiber link. The first device sends a coded signal, and the wavelength of the coded signal is outside the first waveband.
可选地,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律包括:所述光纤链路上所述调光单元的个数,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的位置,以及所述光纤链路上相邻所述调光单元的间隔中的至少一种。Optionally, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link includes: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link At least one of the position and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link.
第三方面,提供了一种光纤端口识别装置,用于第一设备,该光纤端口识别装置包括用于执行第一方面提供的光纤端口识别方法的各个模块。In a third aspect, an optical fiber port identification device is provided for use in a first device, and the optical fiber port identification device includes various modules for executing the optical fiber port identification method provided in the first aspect.
可选地,光纤端口识别装置包括:接收模块、第一发送模块和处理模块,其中,所述接收模块包括:滤波器和环形器;所述处理模块分别连接所述第一发送模块和所述环形器,所述环形器连接所述滤波器和所述第一发送模块,所述滤波器连接所述第一光纤链路;所述处理模块用于控制所述第一发送模块向所述环形器发送所述第一波段的信号;所述环形器用于向所述滤波器发送来自所述第一发送模块的信号,所述滤波器用于向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述环形器的信号;所述滤波器用于接收来自所述第一光纤链路的所述编码信号,以及向所述环形器发送来自所述第一光纤链路的所述编码信号;所述环形器用于向所述处理模块发送来自所述滤波器的所述编码信号。Optionally, the optical fiber port identification device includes: a receiving module, a first sending module, and a processing module, wherein the receiving module includes: a filter and a circulator; the processing module is respectively connected to the first sending module and the Circulator, the circulator is connected to the filter and the first transmission module, the filter is connected to the first optical fiber link; the processing module is used to control the first transmission module to the ring The circulator sends the signal of the first waveband; the circulator is used to send the signal from the first sending module to the filter, and the filter is used to send the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link. The signal; the filter is used to receive the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, and to send the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator; the circulator is used to The processing module sends the encoded signal from the filter.
第四方面,提供了一种光纤端口识别装置,用于第二设备,该光纤端口识别装置包括用于执行第二方面提供的光纤端口识别方法的各个模块。In a fourth aspect, an optical fiber port identification device is provided for use in a second device, and the optical fiber port identification device includes various modules for executing the optical fiber port identification method provided in the second aspect.
可选地,光纤端口识别装置包括:接收模块、第一发送模块、第二发送模块和处理模块,其中,所述接收模块包括:滤波器和环形器;所述接收模块包括:滤波器和环形器;所述处理模块分别连接所述第一发送模块、所述第二发送模块和所述环形器,所述环形器连接所述滤波器和所述第一发送模块,所述滤波器连接所述第二发送模块和所述第一光纤链路;所述处理模块用于控制所述第一发送模块向所述环形器发送所述第一波段的信号;所述环形器用于向所述滤波器发送来自所述第一发送模块的信号;所述滤波器用于向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述环形器的信号;所述滤波器用于接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号,以及向所述环形器发送来自所述第一光纤链路的信号;所述环形器用于向所述处理模块发送来自所述滤波器的信号;所述处理模块用于根据来自所述环形器的信号, 控制所述第二发送模块向所述滤波器发送所述编码信号;所述滤波器用于向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述第二发送模块的信号。Optionally, the optical fiber port identification device includes: a receiving module, a first sending module, a second sending module, and a processing module, wherein the receiving module includes: a filter and a circulator; the receiving module includes: a filter and a circulator The processing module is respectively connected to the first sending module, the second sending module and the circulator, the circulator is connected to the filter and the first sending module, and the filter is connected to the The second sending module and the first optical fiber link; the processing module is used to control the first sending module to send the first waveband signal to the circulator; the circulator is used to send the filter The filter sends the signal from the first sending module; the filter is used to send the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link; the filter is used to receive the modulation on the first optical fiber link The signal in the first waveband reflected by the optical unit, and the signal from the first optical fiber link is sent to the circulator; the circulator is used to send the signal from the filter to the processing module; The processing module is used to control the second sending module to send the encoded signal to the filter according to the signal from the circulator; the filter is used to send the encoded signal to the first optical fiber link The signal of the second sending module.
第五方面,提供了一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括:第一设备,以及所述第一设备连接的多条光纤链路,所述光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及所述光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;所述调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,且所述光纤链路上调光单元对所述第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1;所述第一设备包括:第三方面提供的光纤端口识别装置。In a fifth aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes: a first device, and a plurality of optical fiber links connected to the first device, the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port, and the optical fiber There are multiple dimming units corresponding to the port, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different; the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the optical fiber link is dimmed The sum of the reflectivity of the unit to the signals of the first waveband is less than or equal to 1, and the first device includes: the optical fiber port identification device provided in the third aspect.
可选地,所述通信系统还包括:第二设备,且所述第一设备通过第一光纤链路连接至所述第二设备;所述第二设备包括:第四方面提供的光纤端口识别装置。Optionally, the communication system further includes: a second device, and the first device is connected to the second device through a first optical fiber link; the second device includes: the optical fiber port identification provided by the fourth aspect Device.
第六方面,提供了一种光纤端口识别方法,其特征在于,用于第五方面提供的通信系统,所述方法包括:所述第一设备获取所述多条光纤链路中每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,所述光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:所述光纤端口对应的调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律;所述第一设备接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,所述多条光纤链路包括所述第一光纤链路,所述编码信号由所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射所述第一波段内的信号后得到;所述第一设备根据所述编码信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。In a sixth aspect, an optical fiber port identification method is provided, which is characterized in that it is used in the communication system provided in the fifth aspect. The method includes: the first device obtains each optical fiber link among the plurality of optical fiber links. The target signal of the optical fiber port on the road, the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link; the first device receives the optical fiber from the first optical fiber The encoded signal of the link, the plurality of optical fiber links include the first optical fiber link, and the encoded signal is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first wavelength band by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link The first device identifies the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link based on the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
可选地,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律包括:所述光纤链路上所述调光单元的个数,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的位置,以及所述光纤链路上相邻所述调光单元的间隔中的至少一种。Optionally, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link includes: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link At least one of the position and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link.
可选地,所述光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与所述每个光纤端口的距离小于距离阈值,且与所述多个光纤端口中除所述每个光纤端口之外的其他光纤端口的距离大于或等于距离阈值;所述第一设备根据所述编码信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,包括:所述第一设备确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,所述检测子信号由所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元反射所述第一波段内的信号后得到;所述第一设备根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。Optionally, the optical fiber link is provided with a plurality of optical fiber ports, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold, and is divided by the plurality of optical fiber ports. The distance of the other optical fiber ports except for each optical fiber port is greater than or equal to the distance threshold; the first device performs a correction on the first optical fiber port according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link. The identification of the optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link includes: the first device determines the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein the detection sub-signal is determined by the The plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are obtained after reflecting the signal in the first waveband; the first device detects sub-signals corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, And the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, identifying the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link.
可选地,所述光纤链路上具有所述每个光纤端口对应的等间距排布的多个目标位置;所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元设置在所述多个目标位置中的至少部分目标位置上,且所述至少部分目标位置包括:所述多个目标位置中的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置;所述第一设备确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号,包括:所述第一设备根据单位时长以及所述每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量,确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,所述单位时长为:所述第一波段内的信号在所述多个目标位置中相邻目标位置间的光纤链路上传输所需的时长。Optionally, the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged in the plurality of At least part of the target positions in the target position, and the at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position in the plurality of target positions; the first device determines that the coded signal corresponds to The detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link includes: the first device determines that the encoded signal corresponds to the The detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link; wherein, the unit duration is: the signal in the first waveband is transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the plurality of target positions The length of time required.
可选地,在目标方向上,不同光纤链路上相同次序的光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,所述目标方向包括:靠近或远离所述第一设备的方向;所述方法还包括:所述第一设备确定所述每条光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的次序,所述光纤端口对应的次序为:在所述目标方向上,所述光纤端口在所在的光纤链路上的多个光纤端口中的次序;所述第一设备根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端 口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,包括:在所述目标方向上,若所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口对应的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第一光纤端口的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致,则所述第一设备将所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口识别为所述第一光纤端口,所述第一光纤端口为对应所述目标次序的任一光纤端口。Optionally, in the target direction, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports in the same order on different fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: a direction close to or away from the first device; the method It also includes: the first device determines the sequence corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, and the sequence corresponding to the optical fiber port is: in the target direction, the optical fiber port is located in the optical fiber chain. The sequence among the multiple optical fiber ports on the road; the first device according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, Identifying the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link includes: in the target direction, if the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link reflects the dimming unit The arrangement rule is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first optical fiber port, and the first device recognizes the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link as the first Optical fiber port, the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
可选地,所述第一设备连接有多级支路,且每级支路包括多条支路;每条第1级支路与所述第一设备连接,每条支路与多条下一级支路连接,且不同支路连接的下一级支路不同;所述光纤链路包括:所述多级支路中每级支路中的一条支路;所述光纤链路上设置的光纤端口包括:每级支路上靠近所述第一设备的光纤端口;不同第1级支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,同一支路连接的多条支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同;所述方法还包括:所述第一设备确定每个光纤端口对应的端口组,其中,每个第1级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第1级支路上的光纤端口;每个第i级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口,以及所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口连接的前i-1级支路上的光纤端口,i≥2;所述第一设备根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,包括:在所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的前j个光纤端口的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第二光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致时,所述第一设备将所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的第j个光纤端口识别为所述第二光纤端口,所述第二光纤端口为所述多条光纤链路上的任一光纤端口。Optionally, the first device is connected to multiple branches, and each branch includes multiple branches; each first-level branch is connected to the first device, and each branch is connected to multiple downstream branches. The first-level branch is connected, and the next-level branches connected by different branches are different; the optical fiber link includes: one branch in each level of the multi-level branch; the optical fiber link is set The optical fiber ports include: the optical fiber ports on each branch near the first device; the arrangement of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on different first branches is different, and the optical fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to the same branch correspond to The arrangement rules of the dimming units are different; the method further includes: the first device determines the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch includes: The optical fiber port on each level 1 branch; the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each i-th level branch includes: the optical fiber port on each i-th level branch, and each i-th level branch The optical fiber port on the front i-1 level branch connected to the optical fiber port on the road, i≥2; the first device according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and each The target signal of the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link, and the identification of the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link includes: detection of the first j optical fiber ports close to the first device on the first optical fiber link The arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the sub-signal is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the port group corresponding to the second optical fiber port, the first device transfers the first optical fiber chain The j-th optical fiber port close to the first device on the road is identified as the second optical fiber port, and the second optical fiber port is any optical fiber port on the multiple optical fiber links.
可选地,所述多条第1级支路均通过初始支路与所述第一设备连接;所述光纤端口对应的一部分调光单元位于所述光纤端口所在的支路上,所述光纤端口对应的另一部分调光单元位于所述光纤端口连接的支路上。Optionally, the multiple first-level branches are all connected to the first device through an initial branch; a part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located, and the optical fiber port The other part of the corresponding dimming unit is located on the branch connected to the optical fiber port.
可选地,在所述第一设备接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号之前,所述方法还包括:所述第一设备向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号。Optionally, before the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, the method further includes: the first device sends the signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link .
可选地,所述光纤系统还包括:第二设备,且所述第一设备通过所述第一光纤链路连接至所述第二设备,所述调光单元还用于透射所述第一波段外的信号;在所述第一设备接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号之前,所述方法还包括:所述第二设备向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号;所述第二设备接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号;所述第二设备根据从所述第一光纤链路上接收到的信号,通过所述第一光纤链路向所述第一设备发送编码信号,所述编码信号的波长位于所述第一波段外;所述第一设备接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,包括:所述第一设备接收所述第二设备通过所述第一光纤链路发送的所述编码信号。Optionally, the optical fiber system further includes: a second device, and the first device is connected to the second device through the first optical fiber link, and the dimming unit is also used to transmit the first device. Signals outside the band; before the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, the method further includes: the second device sends the signals in the first wavelength band to the first optical fiber link Signal; the second device receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link; the second device is based on the signal received from the first optical fiber link , Sending an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first wavelength band; the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, including : The first device receives the encoded signal sent by the second device through the first optical fiber link.
可选地,所述方法还包括:所述第一设备确定所述每条光纤链路的参考信号,所述光纤链路的参考信号用于指示:所述光纤链路上所有调光单元的排布规律;在所述编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与所述多条光纤链路的参考信号所指示的排布规律均不同时,第一设备确定所述第一光纤链路故障。Optionally, the method further includes: the first device determines the reference signal of each optical fiber link, and the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: Arrangement law; when the arrangement law of the dimming unit reflected by the coded signal is different from the arrangement law indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, the first device determines the first optical fiber The link is down.
可选地,在所述第一设备确定所述第一光纤链路故障之后,所述方法还包括:所述第一设备根据所述编码信号,确定所述第一光纤链路中故障的链路段。Optionally, after the first device determines that the first optical fiber link is faulty, the method further includes: the first device determines the faulty link in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal Road section.
可选地,所述调光单元包括:光栅。Optionally, the dimming unit includes: a grating.
可选地,所述第一波段的带宽的范围为2纳米至10纳米,和/或,所述第一波段的信号的波长与所述第一波段的中心波长之差的绝对值≤5纳米。Optionally, the bandwidth of the first waveband ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the absolute value of the difference between the wavelength of the signal in the first waveband and the center wavelength of the first waveband is ≤ 5 nanometers .
可选地,所述第一设备包括:第一发送模块、滤波器、环形器以及处理模块;所述处理模块分别连接所述第一发送模块和所述环形器,所述环形器连接所述滤波器和所述第一发送模块,所述滤波器连接所述第一光纤链路;所述第一设备向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号,包括:所述处理模块控制所述第一发送模块向所述环形器发送所述第一波段的信号;所述环形器向所述滤波器发送来自所述第一发送模块的信号;所述滤波器向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述环形器的信号;所述第一设备接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,包括:所述滤波器接收来自所述第一光纤链路的所述编码信号;所述滤波器向所述环形器发送来自所述第一光纤链路的所述编码信号;所述环形器向所述处理模块发送来自所述滤波器的所述编码信号。Optionally, the first device includes: a first transmission module, a filter, a circulator, and a processing module; the processing module is respectively connected to the first transmission module and the circulator, and the circulator is connected to the A filter and the first sending module, and the filter is connected to the first optical fiber link; the first device sending a signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link includes: the The processing module controls the first sending module to send the first waveband signal to the circulator; the circulator sends the signal from the first sending module to the filter; the filter sends the signal from the first sending module to the filter; The first optical fiber link sends the signal from the circulator; the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, including: the filter receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link The filter sends the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator; the circulator sends the encoded signal from the filter to the processing module.
可选地,所述第二设备包括:第一发送模块、滤波器、环形器、第二发送模块以及处理模块;所述处理模块分别连接所述第一发送模块、所述第二发送模块和所述环形器,所述环形器连接所述滤波器和所述第一发送模块,所述滤波器连接所述第二发送模块和所述第一光纤链路;所述第二设备向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号,包括:所述处理模块控制所述第一发送模块向所述环形器发送所述第一波段的信号;所述环形器向所述滤波器发送来自所述第一发送模块的信号;所述滤波器向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述环形器的信号;所述第二设备接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号,包括:所述滤波器接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号;所述滤波器向所述环形器发送来自所述第一光纤链路的信号;所述环形器向所述处理模块发送来自所述滤波器的信号;所述第二设备根据从所述第一光纤链路上接收到的信号,通过所述第一光纤链路向所述第一设备发送编码信号,包括:所述处理模块根据来自所述环形器的信号,控制所述第二发送模块向所述滤波器发送所述编码信号;所述滤波器向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述第二发送模块的信号。Optionally, the second device includes: a first sending module, a filter, a circulator, a second sending module, and a processing module; the processing module is respectively connected to the first sending module, the second sending module, and The circulator, the circulator connects the filter and the first transmission module, and the filter connects the second transmission module and the first optical fiber link; the second device sends the The first optical fiber link sends the signal in the first waveband, including: the processing module controls the first sending module to send the signal of the first waveband to the circulator; and the circulator sends the signal to the filter The device sends the signal from the first sending module; the filter sends the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link; the second device receives the dimming on the first optical fiber link The signal in the first waveband reflected by the unit includes: the filter receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link; The circulator sends the signal from the first optical fiber link; the circulator sends the signal from the filter to the processing module; the second device is based on the signal received from the first optical fiber link , Sending an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link includes: the processing module controls the second sending module to send the encoded signal to the filter according to the signal from the circulator Signal; the filter sends a signal from the second sending module to the first optical fiber link.
第七方面,提供了一种计算机存储介质,所述存储介质内存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现第一方面或第二方面所述的光纤端口识别方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer storage medium is provided, and a computer program is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the optical fiber port identification method of the first aspect or the second aspect is implemented.
第八方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在网络设备上运行时,使得网络设备执行第一方面或第二方面所述的光纤端口识别方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, when the computer program product runs on a network device, the network device executes the optical fiber port identification method described in the first aspect or the second aspect.
第九方面,提供了一种网络设备,所述网络设备包括:至少一个处理器、至少一个接口、存储器和至少一个通信总线,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序,以实现第一方面或第二方面所述的光纤端口识别方法。In a ninth aspect, a network device is provided. The network device includes: at least one processor, at least one interface, memory, and at least one communication bus. The processor is configured to execute a program stored in the memory to implement the first The optical fiber port identification method according to the first aspect or the second aspect.
上述第二方面至第九方面的有益效果均可以参考上述第一方面的有益效果,本申请实施例在此不做赘述。For the beneficial effects of the second aspect to the ninth aspect described above, reference may be made to the beneficial effects of the first aspect described above, and the embodiments of the present application will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的结构示意图;2 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种PON系统的结构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a PON system provided by an embodiment of the application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种调光单元对光信号的反射情况示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of the reflection of optical signals by a dimming unit provided by an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种光纤端口识别方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for identifying an optical fiber port according to an embodiment of the application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种光纤端口识别装置的结构示意图;6 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical fiber port identification device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种第二设备发出的编码信号的时序图;FIG. 7 is a timing diagram of an encoded signal sent by a second device according to an embodiment of the application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的结构示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信系统的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system provided by an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种光纤链路的故障示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a failure of an optical fiber link according to an embodiment of the application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一种光纤链路的故障示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a failure of another optical fiber link provided by an embodiment of the application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种光纤链路的故障示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a failure of another optical fiber link provided by an embodiment of the application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的另一种光纤链路的故障示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a failure of another optical fiber link provided by an embodiment of the application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种光纤端口识别装置的结构示意图;14 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical fiber port identification device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的另一种光纤端口识别装置的结构示意图;15 is a schematic structural diagram of another optical fiber port identification device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为使本申请的原理、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施方式作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the principles, technical solutions, and advantages of the present application clearer, the implementation manners of the present application will be described in further detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于通信系统。该通信系统包括:多条光纤链路,以及该多条光纤链路连接的多个设备。The technical solution provided in this application can be applied to a communication system. The communication system includes multiple optical fiber links and multiple devices connected by the multiple optical fiber links.
示例地,图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图,图1中以通信系统中的多条光纤链路可以相互独立为例。如图1所示,该通信系统中的多条光纤链路分别为:光纤链路a1至光纤链路a8,该通信系统中的多个设备包括设备10和设备11。Illustratively, FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application. In FIG. 1, it is taken as an example that multiple optical fiber links in the communication system can be independent of each other. As shown in FIG. 1, the multiple optical fiber links in the communication system are: optical fiber link a1 to optical fiber link a8, and multiple devices in the communication system include device 10 and device 11.
图1中以设备10和设备11均与光纤链路a1至光纤链路a8连接为例,可选地,通信系统中的每个设备均可以与该通信系统中的一条或多条光纤链路连接。比如,如图2所示,该通信系统中的多个设备包括:设备10至设备18,其中,设备10与光纤链路a1至光纤链路a8的一端均连接,设备11至设备18这八个设备与光纤链路a1至光纤链路a8的另一端一一对应连接。In FIG. 1, the device 10 and the device 11 are connected to the optical fiber link a1 to the optical fiber link a8 as an example. Optionally, each device in the communication system can be connected to one or more optical fiber links in the communication system. connect. For example, as shown in Figure 2, multiple devices in the communication system include: device 10 to device 18, where device 10 is connected to one end of optical fiber link a1 to fiber link a8, and device 11 to device 18 are Each device is connected to the other end of the optical fiber link a1 to the optical fiber link a8 in a one-to-one correspondence.
进一步地,通信系统中的每条光纤链路上均可以设置有光纤端口,以及光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同。需要说明的是,每条光纤链路上可以设置有至少一个具有对应的多个调光单元的光纤端口,本申请实施例中以每条光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,且每个光纤端口均具有对应的多个调光单元为例。Further, each optical fiber link in the communication system may be provided with an optical fiber port and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different. It should be noted that each optical fiber link may be provided with at least one optical fiber port with corresponding multiple dimming units. In the embodiment of the present application, each optical fiber link is provided with multiple optical fiber ports, and each The optical fiber ports all have multiple corresponding dimming units as an example.
示例地,在各个光纤链路相互独立的情况下,每条光纤链路上的光纤端口可以包括:该光纤链路两端的两个光纤端口。如图1和图2所示,光纤链路a1上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b1和c1,光纤链路a2上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b2和c2,光纤链路a3上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b3和c3,光纤链路a4上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b4和c4,光纤链路a5上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b5和c5,光纤链路a6上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b6和c6,光纤链路a7上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b7和c7,光纤链路a8上的光纤端口包括:光纤端口b8和c8。For example, in the case where the respective optical fiber links are independent of each other, the optical fiber ports on each optical fiber link may include: two optical fiber ports at both ends of the optical fiber link. As shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2, the fiber ports on the fiber link a1 include: fiber ports b1 and c1, the fiber ports on the fiber link a2 include: fiber ports b2 and c2, and the fiber ports on the fiber link a3 include: : Fiber ports b3 and c3, fiber ports on fiber link a4 include: fiber ports b4 and c4, fiber ports on fiber link a5 include: fiber ports b5 and c5, fiber ports on fiber link a6 include: fiber Ports b6 and c6, the fiber ports on the fiber link a7 include: fiber ports b7 and c7, and the fiber ports on the fiber link a8 include: fiber ports b8 and c8.
可选地,本申请实施例提供的通信系统可以是无源光网络(passive optical network,PON) 系统或者其他通信系统,只要通信系统包括通过多条光纤链路连接的设备即可。其中,PON系统可以为以太网无源光网络(ethernet passive optical network,EPON)系统或吉比特无源光网络(gigabit capable passive optical network,GPON)系统等,本申请实施例并不对此进行限定。如图3所示,PON系统包括:光线路终端(optical line terminal,OLT)、光纤配线架(optical dstribution frame,ODF)、入户线缆交接箱、光线路终端(Optical Line Terminal,ONT)(或者光网络单元(optical network unit,OUN),图3中以ONT为例)以及网络中的多个设备。需要说明的是,PON系统可以包括至少一个OLT(图3中仅示出了一个OLT)和多个ONT(图3中仅示出了三个ONT),且每个OLT连接有多个ONT,当PON系统包括多个OLT时,该多个OLT之间可以存在连接关系。当通信系统可以是PON系统时,该通信系统中的设备可以包括:PON系统中通过多条光纤链路连接的设备,比如OLT和多个ONT,或者,OLT和ODF,或者,多个OLT。Optionally, the communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a passive optical network (PON) system or other communication system, as long as the communication system includes devices connected through multiple optical fiber links. The PON system may be an Ethernet passive optical network (ethernet passive optical network, EPON) system or a gigabit passive optical network (gigabit capable passive optical network, GPON) system, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the PON system includes: optical line terminal (OLT), optical dstribution frame (ODF), home cable transfer box, and optical line terminal (ONT) (Or optical network unit (OUN), ONT is taken as an example in Figure 3) and multiple devices in the network. It should be noted that the PON system may include at least one OLT (only one OLT is shown in FIG. 3) and multiple ONTs (only three ONTs are shown in FIG. 3), and each OLT is connected with multiple ONTs. When the PON system includes multiple OLTs, there may be a connection relationship between the multiple OLTs. When the communication system may be a PON system, the equipment in the communication system may include: equipment connected through multiple optical fiber links in the PON system, such as an OLT and multiple ONTs, or OLT and ODF, or multiple OLTs.
目前通信系统中的光纤链路通常较为复杂,且每条光纤链路上的光纤端口也较多。因此,往往需要对光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,以准确地将设备连接至相应地光纤链路。并且,光纤链路上往往设置有大量光纤无源器件,而光纤无源器件容易被外界环境影响而损坏(例如光纤端口损坏、光纤弯曲或者光纤断裂等),导致光纤链路故障,进而导致通信系统的光纤通信中断。因此,目前亟需一种适用于较为复杂的光纤链路的光纤端口识别,以及光纤链路的故障检测的方法。The optical fiber links in the current communication system are usually more complicated, and there are more optical fiber ports on each optical fiber link. Therefore, it is often necessary to identify the fiber port on the fiber link to accurately connect the device to the corresponding fiber link. In addition, a large number of optical fiber passive components are often installed on optical fiber links, and optical fiber passive components are easily damaged by the external environment (such as fiber port damage, fiber bending or fiber breakage, etc.), resulting in fiber link failure and communication The optical fiber communication of the system is interrupted. Therefore, there is an urgent need for a method suitable for optical fiber port identification of relatively complex optical fiber links and fault detection of optical fiber links.
在本申请实施例中,通过在多条光纤链路中的每条光纤链路上设置光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,以实现对光纤链路上光纤端口的识别以及对光纤链路的故障检测。In the embodiment of the present application, multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port are provided on each of the multiple fiber links to realize the identification of the fiber ports on the fiber links and the monitoring of the fiber links. Troubleshooting.
示例地,在该通信系统中的某一设备需要对某一光纤链路(称为第一光纤链路)上光纤端口进行识别以及对光纤链路的故障检测时,该设备可以首先确定多条光纤链路上各个光纤端口的目标信号,光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:光纤端口对应的调光单元在光纤链路上的排布规律;之后,该设备需要接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,并根据之前获取的各个光纤端口的目标信号和该编码信号,对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别以及对该第一光纤链路进行故障检测。需要说明的是,调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,且每条光纤链路上所有调光单元对第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1,上述编码信号可以是由第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射第一波段内的信号后得到的信号,该信号能够反映第一光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律。因此,该设备在将之前获取的各个光纤端口的目标信号与该编码信号进行比对后,便可以识别出该第一光纤链路上的光纤端口,以及实现对该第一光纤链路的故障检测。For example, when a certain device in the communication system needs to identify the fiber port on a certain fiber link (referred to as the first fiber link) and detect the failure of the fiber link, the device can first determine multiple The target signal of each fiber port on the fiber link, the target signal of the fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port on the fiber link; after that, the device needs to receive the signal from the first fiber link Encode the signal, and identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and perform fault detection on the first optical fiber link according to the previously acquired target signal of each optical fiber port and the encoded signal. It should be noted that the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the sum of the reflectivity of all the dimming units on each optical fiber link to the signal in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1. The above-mentioned encoded signal may be The signal obtained after the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link reflects the signal in the first waveband, and the signal can reflect the arrangement law of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link. Therefore, after comparing the previously acquired target signal of each optical fiber port with the encoded signal, the device can identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and realize the failure of the first optical fiber link. Detection.
每条光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元可以设置在该光纤端口的附近。每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与该光纤端口的距离较近(比如小于距离阈值),且在光纤链路上具有多个光纤端口时,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与该多个光纤端口中其他光纤端口的距离较远(比如大于或等于距离阈值)。比如,图1和图2中光纤端口b1对应的多个调光单元包括:光纤链路a1上靠近光纤端口b1的5个调光单元,光纤端口c1对应的多个调光单元包括:光纤链路a1上靠近光纤端口c1的5个调光单元,光纤端口b2对应的多个调光单元包括:光纤链路a2上靠近光纤端口b2的4个调光单元。Multiple dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link can be arranged near the optical fiber port. When the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port and the fiber port is relatively close (for example, less than the distance threshold), and there are multiple fiber ports on the fiber link, the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port is related to the multiple fiber ports. The other fiber ports in the fiber port are far away (for example, greater than or equal to the distance threshold). For example, the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 in Figures 1 and 2 include: 5 dimming units on the fiber link a1 close to the fiber port b1, and the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c1 include: fiber chain The five dimming units on the road a1 close to the optical fiber port c1, and the multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port b2 include: 4 dimming units on the optical fiber link a2 close to the optical fiber port b2.
每条光纤链路上具有与每个光纤端口对应的多个目标位置,且该多个目标位置等间距排布;每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元设置在该光纤端口对应的至少部分目标位置上,且该 至少部分目标位置包括:该光纤端口对应的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置。例如,如图1所示,光纤链路a1上设置有光纤端口b1对应的5个目标位置,分别为位置w1至w5,这5个目标位置等间距排布,光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元可以位于这5个目标位置。同理,其他光纤链路上也可以设置有每个光纤端口对应的5个目标位置,且这5个目标位置上可以是全部设置有调光单元,也可以是一部分目标位置上设置有调光单元,而另一部分目标位置上未设置有调光单元。但是,这5个目标位置中的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置均设置有调光单元。Each optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port, and the plurality of target positions are arranged at equal intervals; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged at least part of the corresponding optical fiber port At the target position, and the at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position corresponding to the optical fiber port. For example, as shown in Figure 1, the optical fiber link a1 is provided with five target positions corresponding to the optical fiber port b1, namely positions w1 to w5. The five target positions are arranged at equal intervals, and the five target positions corresponding to the optical fiber port b1 are arranged at equal intervals. The light unit can be located at these 5 target positions. In the same way, 5 target positions corresponding to each fiber port can also be set on other optical fiber links, and the 5 target positions can be all equipped with dimming units, or some of the target positions can be equipped with dimming units. Unit, and another part of the target position is not provided with a dimming unit. However, the first target position and the last target position of the 5 target positions are both provided with a dimming unit.
多条光纤链路中不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同。如图1或图2中8条光纤链路a1至a8上调光单元的排布规律互不相同。其中,调光单元在光纤链路上的排布规律包括:光纤链路上调光单元的个数,调光单元在光纤链路上的位置,以及光纤链路上相邻调光单元的间隔中的至少一种。本申请实施例中以该排布规律包括:光纤链路上调光单元的个数,调光单元在光纤链路上的位置,以及光纤链路上相邻调光单元的间隔为例。当两条光纤链路上的调光单元的排布规律不同时,可以得知,这两条光纤链路上调光单元的个数、位置和间距中的至少一种不同。The arrangement rules of dimming units on different optical fiber links in multiple optical fiber links are different. The arrangement of the dimming units on the eight optical fiber links a1 to a8 in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2 are different from each other. Among them, the arrangement of dimming units on the fiber link includes: the number of dimming units on the fiber link, the position of the dimming unit on the fiber link, and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the fiber link At least one of them. In the embodiment of the present application, the arrangement rule includes: the number of dimming units on the optical fiber link, the position of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the interval between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link as an example. When the arrangement rules of the dimming units on the two optical fiber links are different, it can be known that at least one of the number, position, and spacing of the dimming units on the two optical fiber links is different.
示例地,在不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同的基础上,若多条光纤链路相互独立,则在目标方向上,不同光纤链路上相同次序的光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,该目标方向可以是任一方向。例如,如图1或图2所示,假设光纤链路中靠近设备10的光纤端口为第1个光纤端口,且通过每个光纤端口对应的多个目标位置上是否设置有调光单元来表示该光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律。那么,光纤链路a1上的第1个光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元的排布规律可以表示为11111,表示光纤端口b1对应的5个目标位置上均设置有调光单元。光纤链路a2上的第1个光纤端口b2对应的5个调光单元的排布规律可以表示为11101,表示光纤端口b1对应的第1至3个目标位置以及第5个目标位置上均设置有调光单元,但第4个目标位置并未设置有调光单元。可以看出,光纤链路a1上的第1个光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元的排布规律(11111)与光纤链路a2上的第1个光纤端口b2对应的5个调光单元的排布规律(11101)并不相同。For example, on the basis of different arrangement rules of dimming units on different fiber links, if multiple fiber links are independent of each other, in the target direction, the dimming corresponding to the fiber ports in the same order on different fiber links The arrangement rules of the units are different, and the target direction can be any direction. For example, as shown in Figure 1 or Figure 2, it is assumed that the optical fiber port close to the device 10 in the optical fiber link is the first optical fiber port, and it is indicated by whether a dimming unit is provided on multiple target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port The arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port. Then, the arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the first fiber port b1 on the optical fiber link a1 can be expressed as 11111, which means that the 5 target positions corresponding to the fiber port b1 are all provided with dimming units. The arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the first fiber port b2 on the fiber link a2 can be expressed as 11101, which means that the first to third target positions and the fifth target position corresponding to the fiber port b1 are set There is a dimming unit, but the 4th target position is not equipped with a dimming unit. It can be seen that the arrangement of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the first fiber port b1 on the fiber link a1 (11111) is the same as the 5 dimming units corresponding to the first fiber port b2 on the fiber link a2 The arrangement rules (11101) are not the same.
可以看出,在本申请实施例中,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元具有独特的排布规律,因此,可以基于该排布规律实现对光纤链路进行光纤端口识别或故障检测。It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port has a unique arrangement rule. Therefore, the optical fiber port identification or fault detection of the optical fiber link can be realized based on the arrangement rule.
又进一步地,在光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,以及每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元时,光纤链路上对应同一光纤端口的不同调光单元的间距较小,光纤链路上对应不同光纤端口的不同调光单元的间距较大。如图1或图2所示,光纤链路a1上光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元的间距均较小,但光纤链路a1上光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元与光纤端口c1对应的5个调光单元的间距较大。需要说明的是,说明书附图中仅是示意性地示出了这些间距。往往光纤链路上对应同一光纤端口的不同调光单元的间距较小,比如10厘米、20厘米等,往往光纤链路上对应不同光纤端口的不同调光单元的间距较大,比如,100米、1000米、10000米等。Furthermore, when multiple optical fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and multiple dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port, the distance between different dimming units corresponding to the same optical fiber port on the optical fiber link is small, and the optical fiber chain The distance between different dimming units corresponding to different fiber ports on the road is relatively large. As shown in Figure 1 or Figure 2, the distances between the five dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 on the fiber link a1 are small, but the five dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 on the fiber link a1 and the fiber port c1 The corresponding 5 dimming units have a larger spacing. It should be noted that these pitches are only schematically shown in the drawings of the specification. Usually the distance between different dimming units corresponding to the same fiber port on the fiber link is small, such as 10 cm, 20 cm, etc., and the distance between different dimming units corresponding to different fiber ports on the fiber link is often larger, for example, 100 meters , 1000 meters, 10000 meters, etc.
本申请实施例中的调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,且光纤链路上调光单元对第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1。调光单元还可以用于透射第一波段外的信号。可以看出,调光单元是一种具有半透半反功能的结构,比如光栅(如啁啾光纤布拉格光栅(chirped fiber bragg grating,CFBG))、半透半反膜等。需要说明的是,此处的“半透半反”是指,透 射一部分信号,并反射一部分信号,且透射的信号占比和反射的信号占比可以相等也可以不等。The dimming unit in the embodiment of the present application is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the sum of the reflectance of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link to the signal in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1. The dimming unit can also be used to transmit signals outside the first waveband. It can be seen that the dimming unit is a structure with a transflective function, such as a grating (such as a chirped fiber bragg grating (CFBG)), a transflective film, and the like. It should be noted that the "transflective" here means that part of the signal is transmitted and part of the signal is reflected, and the proportion of the transmitted signal and the proportion of the reflected signal may be equal or different.
每条光纤链路上的所有调光单元对第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1,这样能够避免光纤链路上存在部分调光单元将第一波段的信号全部反射。这样一来,当该条光纤链路上传输有第一波段的信号时,该条光纤链路上的每个调光单元都能接收到第一波段的信号,都能够对该第一波段的信号进行反射。The sum of the reflectivities of all the dimming units on each optical fiber link to the first waveband signal is less than or equal to 1, which can prevent some dimming units on the optical fiber link from reflecting all the first waveband signals. In this way, when the first waveband signal is transmitted on the optical fiber link, each dimming unit on the optical fiber link can receive the first waveband signal, and all the first waveband signals can be received. The signal is reflected.
可选地,每个调光单元对第一波段的信号的反射率的范围为[1%,10%]。在光纤链路上传输有第一波段的信号时,将该反射率设置的较小,能够减少光纤链路上多个调光单元所反射的第一波段的信号的叠加,减弱了调光单元反射信号之间的叠加所引起鬼影现象。Optionally, the range of the reflectivity of each dimming unit to the signal of the first waveband is [1%, 10%]. When the first waveband signal is transmitted on the optical fiber link, the reflectance is set to be small, which can reduce the superposition of the first waveband signal reflected by multiple dimming units on the optical fiber link, and weaken the dimming unit The ghosting phenomenon caused by the superposition of the reflected signals.
示例地,图4为本申请实施例提供的一种调光单元对光信号的反射情况示意图,如图4所示,该反射情况示意图中的横坐标表示光信号的波长,纵坐标表示调光单元对相应波长的光信号的反射率。从图4可以看出,第一波段可以包括1570纳米至1580纳米,调光单元对1570纳米至1580纳米的光的反射率大于零,且小于或等于2%,该调光单元的中心波长为1575纳米。For example, FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the reflection of an optical signal by a dimming unit provided in an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG. The reflectivity of the unit to the optical signal of the corresponding wavelength. It can be seen from Figure 4 that the first wavelength band may include 1570 nm to 1580 nm, the light reflectivity of the dimming unit for light from 1570 nm to 1580 nm is greater than zero and less than or equal to 2%, and the center wavelength of the dimming unit is 1575 nm.
多条光纤链路上各个调光单元的参数可以均相同。示例地,当调光单元为CFBG时,调光单元的参数包括:CFBG的长度(如1厘米、2厘米等)、啁啾系数等。The parameters of each dimming unit on multiple optical fiber links may be the same. For example, when the dimming unit is CFBG, the parameters of the dimming unit include: the length of the CFBG (such as 1 cm, 2 cm, etc.), the chirp coefficient, and the like.
基于本申请实施例提供的各条光纤链路相互独立的通信系统(如图1或图2所示的通信系统),本申请实施例提供了一种用于该通信系统的光纤端口识别方法。如图5所示,该光纤端口识别方法包括:Based on the communication system in which each optical fiber link is independent of each other provided by the embodiment of the application (the communication system shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2), the embodiment of the application provides a method for identifying an optical fiber port for the communication system. As shown in Figure 5, the optical fiber port identification method includes:
S101、第一设备确定多条光纤链路上各个光纤端口的目标信号,光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:光纤端口对应的调光单元在光纤链路上的排布规律。S101. The first device determines the target signal of each optical fiber port on the multiple optical fiber links, and the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link.
第一设备可以是通信系统中能够获取到多条光纤链路上各个光纤端口的目标信号的任一设备,比如图1所示的通信系统中的设备10。第一设备可以位于中心局(centeroffice,CO)内,中心局也称站点。当通信系统为PON系统时,第一设备可以是OLT。The first device may be any device in the communication system that can obtain the target signal of each optical fiber port on multiple optical fiber links, such as the device 10 in the communication system shown in FIG. 1. The first device may be located in a central office (centeroffice, CO), which is also called a site. When the communication system is a PON system, the first device may be an OLT.
多条光纤链路可以均与第一设备连接,光纤链路上设置的光纤端口和调光单元的解释可以参考前述实施例,本申请实施例在此不做赘述。Multiple optical fiber links may all be connected to the first device. For the explanation of the optical fiber ports and the dimming unit provided on the optical fiber links, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments, and the embodiments of the present application will not be repeated here.
第一设备在S101中需要确定其连接的多条光纤链路上各个光纤端口的目标信号。其中,每个光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:该光纤端口对应的多个调光单元在光纤链路上的排布规律。每个光纤端口的目标信号可以是工作人员存入第一设备的。The first device needs to determine the target signal of each optical fiber port on the multiple optical fiber links to which it is connected in S101. Among them, the target signal of each optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link. The target signal of each fiber port can be stored in the first device by the staff.
示例地,每个光纤端口的目标信号可以用于表示该光纤端口对应的多个调光单元的排布规律。比如,每个光纤端口的目标信号可以包括多个比特位,该多个比特位与该光纤端口对应的多个目标位置一一对应,每个比特位的值用于表示对应的目标位置是否设置有调光单元。当比特位的值为1时,表示该比特位对应的目标位置设置有调光单元,当比特位的值为0时,表示该比特位对应的目标位置未设置有调光单元。For example, the target signal of each optical fiber port may be used to indicate the arrangement law of multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port. For example, the target signal of each optical fiber port may include multiple bits, the multiple bits correspond to multiple target positions corresponding to the optical fiber port, and the value of each bit is used to indicate whether the corresponding target position is set There is a dimming unit. When the value of the bit is 1, it means that the target position corresponding to the bit is provided with a dimming unit, and when the value of the bit is 0, it means that the target position corresponding to the bit is not provided with a dimming unit.
以图1所示的通信系统为例,根据该规律得到的图1中各个光纤端口的目标信号可以如表1所示。Taking the communication system shown in FIG. 1 as an example, the target signal of each optical fiber port in FIG. 1 obtained according to this rule can be as shown in Table 1.
表1Table 1
光纤端口Fiber port 目标信号Target signal
b1b1 1111111111
b2b2 1110111101
b3b3 1101111011
b4b4 1011110111
b5b5 1100111001
b6b6 1001110011
b7b7 1010110101
b8b8 1000110001
c1c1 1111111111
c2c2 1110111101
c3c3 1101111011
c4c4 1011110111
c5c5 1100111001
c6c6 1001110011
c7c7 1010110101
c8c8 1000110001
S102、第二设备向第一光纤链路发送第一波段内的信号。S102. The second device sends a signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link.
该光纤系统还包括:第二设备,且第一设备通过第一光纤链路连接至第二设备,比如该第二设备可以是图1所示的通信系统中的设备11。第二设备可以位于中心局内,如第二设备与第一设备位于同一中心局内,或者第二设备与第一设备位于不同的中心局内。第二设备也可以位于中心局外,本申请实施例对此不作限定。示例地,当通信系统为PON系统时,该第二设备可以是ONT、OUN、ODF与或第一设备不同的OLT等设备,本申请实施例对此不作限定。The optical fiber system further includes a second device, and the first device is connected to the second device through the first optical fiber link. For example, the second device may be the device 11 in the communication system shown in FIG. 1. The second device may be located in a central office, for example, the second device and the first device are located in the same central office, or the second device and the first device are located in a different central office. The second device may also be located outside the central office, which is not limited in this embodiment of the application. For example, when the communication system is a PON system, the second device may be a device such as an ONT, an OUN, an ODF, which is different from the first device, or an OLT, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中以对第一光纤链路进行光纤端口识别为例,该第一光纤链路可以是上述多条光纤链路中的任一条光纤链路,对其他条光纤链路的光纤端口识别过程可以参考对第一光纤链路的光纤端口识别过程。In the embodiment of the present application, the identification of the optical fiber port of the first optical fiber link is taken as an example. The first optical fiber link may be any optical fiber link among the above-mentioned multiple optical fiber links. The identification process can refer to the process of identifying the optical fiber port of the first optical fiber link.
在需要对第一光纤链路进行光纤端口识别时,第二设备可以向该第一光纤链路发送第一波段内的信号(如第一波段内某一波长的信号),以便于第一光纤链路上的调光单元在接收到该信号后能够将该信号反射回第二设备。并且,光纤链路上的调光单元反射回的第一波段内的信号能够反映该光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律,因此,后续操作中可以根据调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号进行光纤端口的识别。When it is necessary to identify the fiber port of the first optical fiber link, the second device can send a signal in the first wavelength band (such as a signal of a certain wavelength in the first wavelength band) to the first optical fiber link to facilitate the first optical fiber link. The dimming unit on the link can reflect the signal back to the second device after receiving the signal. In addition, the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link can reflect the arrangement of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link. Therefore, the subsequent operations can be based on the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit. The signal of the optical fiber port is identified.
可选地,第一波段的带宽的范围可以为2纳米至10纳米,或者其他范围(如3纳米至12纳米等),第一波段的中心波长与第二设备发出的第一波段的信号的波长之差的绝对值可以小于或等于5纳米。这样一来,由于第一波段的带宽较大,且第一波段的中心波长与第一波段的信号的波长较为相近,因此,即便是调光单元受到环境影响导致调光单元反射的波段的中心波长偏移,依然能够保证调光单元能够对第二设备发射的第一波段内的信号进行反射,避免了调光单元的功能受到环境影响。Optionally, the bandwidth of the first waveband can range from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, or other ranges (such as 3 nanometers to 12 nanometers, etc.). The absolute value of the difference in wavelength can be less than or equal to 5 nanometers. In this way, since the bandwidth of the first waveband is larger, and the center wavelength of the first waveband is closer to the wavelength of the first waveband signal, even if the dimming unit is affected by the environment, the center of the waveband reflected by the dimming unit The wavelength shift can still ensure that the dimming unit can reflect the signal in the first waveband emitted by the second device, and avoid the function of the dimming unit from being affected by the environment.
另外,本申请实施例中将调光单元对第一波段的信号的反射率设置的较小,比如反射率的范围为[1%,10%]。这样一来,在第二设备向第一光纤链路发送第一波段的信号后,第一光纤链路上各个调光单元所反射的第一波段的信号的叠加现象较少,从而减弱了由于信号的叠加所导致的鬼影现象。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the reflectance of the dimming unit to the signal of the first waveband is set to be small, for example, the range of reflectance is [1%, 10%]. In this way, after the second device sends the first waveband signal to the first optical fiber link, the superposition of the first waveband signal reflected by each dimming unit on the first optical fiber link is less, thereby reducing the Ghosting phenomenon caused by signal superposition.
可选地,第二设备的结构可以参考如图6所示的光纤端口识别装置的结构,请参考图6,该光纤端口识别装置包括:第一发送模块601、滤波器602、环形器603、第二发送模块604以及处理模块605(如微控制单元(microcontroller unit,MCU))。其中,处理模块605分别连接第一发送模块601、第二发送模块604和环形器603,环形器603连接滤波器602和第一发送模块601,滤波器602连接第二发送模块604和上述第一光纤链路。其中,第一发送模块601用于向环形器603发送信号;环形器603用于将来自第一发送模块601的信号发送至滤波器602,以及将来自滤波器602的信号发送至处理模块605;滤波器602用于将来自环形器603和第二发送模块604的信号发送至第一光纤链路,以及将来自第一光纤链路的信号发送至环形器603;处理模块605用于控制第一发送模块601向环形器603发送信号,以及控制第二发送模块604向滤波器602发送信号。第一发送模块601用于发出第一波段内的信号,第二发送模块604用于发出第一波段外的信号。Optionally, the structure of the second device may refer to the structure of the optical fiber port identification device as shown in FIG. 6, please refer to FIG. 6. The optical fiber port identification device includes: a first transmission module 601, a filter 602, a circulator 603, The second sending module 604 and the processing module 605 (such as a microcontroller unit (MCU)). The processing module 605 is respectively connected to the first sending module 601, the second sending module 604, and the circulator 603, the circulator 603 is connected to the filter 602 and the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 is connected to the second sending module 604 and the aforementioned first sending module. Fiber optic link. Wherein, the first sending module 601 is used to send a signal to the circulator 603; the circulator 603 is used to send the signal from the first sending module 601 to the filter 602 and the signal from the filter 602 to the processing module 605; The filter 602 is used to send the signals from the circulator 603 and the second sending module 604 to the first optical fiber link, and the signal from the first optical link to the circulator 603; the processing module 605 is used to control the first optical fiber link. The sending module 601 sends signals to the circulator 603, and controls the second sending module 604 to send signals to the filter 602. The first sending module 601 is used to send out signals in the first waveband, and the second sending module 604 is used to send out signals outside the first waveband.
在S102中,第二设备中的处理模块605可以控制第一发送模块601向环形器603发送该第一波段内的信号;之后,该环形器603会向滤波器602发送来自第一发送模块601的信号,最后滤波器602会向第一光纤链路发送来自环形器603的信号。这样就实现了将第一波段内的信号发送至第一光纤链路的目的。In S102, the processing module 605 in the second device can control the first sending module 601 to send the signal in the first band to the circulator 603; after that, the circulator 603 will send the signal from the first sending module 601 to the filter 602 Finally, the filter 602 will send the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link. In this way, the purpose of sending the signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link is achieved.
S103、第二设备接收第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号。S103. The second device receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
假设第二设备的结构如图6所示,在S103中,第二设备中的滤波器602会接收到第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号,并向环形器603发送来自第一光纤链路的信号,之后环形器603会向处理模块605发送来自滤波器603的信号。这样就实现了第二设备中的处理模块605接收到第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号。Assuming that the structure of the second device is shown in Figure 6, in S103, the filter 602 in the second device will receive the signal in the first band reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link and send it to the circulator 603 sends the signal from the first optical fiber link, and then the circulator 603 sends the signal from the filter 603 to the processing module 605. In this way, it is realized that the processing module 605 in the second device receives the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
S104、第二设备根据从第一光纤链路上接收到的信号,通过第一光纤链路向第一设备发送编码信号。S104. The second device sends an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link according to the signal received from the first optical fiber link.
第二设备在接收到第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号之后,便可以通过第一光纤链路向第一设备发送编码信号。并且,第二设备通过第一光纤链路向第一设备发送的编码信号的波长位于第一波段外,上述调光单元还用于透射第一波段外的信号,这样一来,就能够保证第二设备将编码信号成功传输至第一设备。示例地,第一波段的中心波长为1575纳米,带宽为10纳米,第二波段的中心波长可以为1310纳米。After receiving the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link, the second device may send the encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link. In addition, the wavelength of the encoded signal sent by the second device to the first device through the first optical fiber link is outside the first waveband, and the above-mentioned dimming unit is also used to transmit signals outside the first waveband. In this way, the first waveband can be guaranteed. The second device successfully transmits the encoded signal to the first device. For example, the center wavelength of the first wavelength band is 1575 nanometers and the bandwidth is 10 nanometers, and the center wavelength of the second wavelength band may be 1310 nanometers.
编码信号是根据第一光纤链路上调光单元反射的信号所生成的,因此,编码信号能够反映第一光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律。The encoded signal is generated according to the signal reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link. Therefore, the encoded signal can reflect the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link.
第二设备将接收到的信号转换为编码信号的过程中,第二设备可以对接收到的信号进行至少一种处理。比如,第二设备首先对接收到的信号进行光电转换,以将接收到的信号由光信号转换为电信号;之后,第二设备再对该电信号进行时钟数据恢复处理,得到在时域上编码的电信号,该电信号可以包括用于表征第一光纤链路上各个调光单元所反射的信号的时域信息;最后,第二设备可以根据该在时域上编码的电信号,生成上述第一波段外的编码信号。When the second device converts the received signal into an encoded signal, the second device may perform at least one type of processing on the received signal. For example, the second device first performs photoelectric conversion on the received signal to convert the received signal from an optical signal to an electrical signal; after that, the second device performs clock data recovery processing on the electrical signal to obtain a time domain The encoded electrical signal, the electrical signal may include time-domain information that is used to characterize the signal reflected by each dimming unit on the first optical fiber link; finally, the second device may generate the signal based on the electrical signal encoded in the time domain The coded signal outside the first band mentioned above.
示例地,以第一光纤链路为图1中的光纤链路a1,第一设备为设备10,第二设备为设备 11为例。若第一光纤链路并无故障,则第二设备发出的第一波段内的信号能够传输至每个调光单元,第二设备发出的该编码信号的时序图可以如图7所示。请参考图7,该时序图中共存在10个高电位,且这10个高电位可以对应光纤链路a1上的10个调光单元,每个调光单元对应的高电位用于表征该调光单元反射的第一波段的信号到达设备11。For example, take the first optical fiber link as the optical fiber link a1 in FIG. 1, the first device as the device 10, and the second device as the device 11 as an example. If the first optical fiber link is not faulty, the signal in the first waveband sent by the second device can be transmitted to each dimming unit, and the timing diagram of the encoded signal sent by the second device can be as shown in FIG. 7. Please refer to Figure 7. There are 10 high potentials in this timing diagram, and these 10 high potentials can correspond to 10 dimming units on the optical fiber link a1, and the corresponding high potential of each dimming unit is used to characterize the dimming. The first waveband signal reflected by the unit reaches the device 11.
由于光纤链路a1中光纤端口c1对应的5个调光单元距离设备11较近,而光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元距离设备11较远,因此,这10个高电位中,前5个高电位用于表征光纤端口c1对应的5个调光单元反射的第一波段的信号到达设备11,后5个高电位用于表征光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元反射的第一波段的信号到达设备11。并且,由于每个光纤端口对应的各个调光单元的距离较近,且光纤端口c1对应的5个调光单元与光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元相距较远,因此,前5个高电位中各个高电位的时延较小,后5个高电位中各个高电位的时延也较小,且前5个高电位和后5个高电位之间的时延较大。Since the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c1 in the fiber link a1 are closer to the device 11, and the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 are farther from the device 11, the first 5 of these 10 high potentials are One high potential is used to characterize the first waveband reflected by the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c1 and reaching the device 11, and the last five high potentials are used to characterize the first waveband reflected by the five dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 The signal arrives at device 11. In addition, since the dimming units corresponding to each fiber port are relatively close, and the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c1 are far away from the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1, the first 5 high The time delay of each high potential among the potentials is small, and the time delay of each high potential of the last five high potentials is also small, and the time delay between the first five high potentials and the last five high potentials is relatively large.
假设第二设备的结构如图6所示,在S104中,第二设备中的处理模块605可以根据来自环形器603的信号,控制第二发送模块604向滤波器602发送上述编码信号,以便于滤波器602向第一光纤链路发送来自第二发送模块602的信号。这样就实现了将该编码信号通过第一光纤链路发送至第一设备。Assuming that the structure of the second device is shown in Figure 6, in S104, the processing module 605 in the second device can control the second sending module 604 to send the above-mentioned encoded signal to the filter 602 according to the signal from the circulator 603, so as to facilitate The filter 602 transmits the signal from the second transmission module 602 to the first optical fiber link. In this way, the encoded signal is sent to the first device through the first optical fiber link.
需要说明的是,若第二设备需要对从第一光纤链路上接收到的信号进行光电转换和时钟数据恢复处理,则如图6所示,该第二设备还可以包括光电转换模块606和时钟数据恢复模块607,光电转换模块606和时钟数据恢复模块607串连在环形器603和处理模块605之间。光电转换模块606用于对来自环形器603的信号进行光电转换,并将光电转换后的信号发送至时钟数据恢复模块607;时钟数据恢复模块607用于对来自光电转换模块606的信号进行时钟数据恢复处理,并将时钟数据恢复处理后的信号发送至处理模块605。此时,处理模块605可以基于来自时钟数据恢复处理模块607的信号,控制第二发送模块604发送上述编码信号。It should be noted that if the second device needs to perform photoelectric conversion and clock data recovery processing on the signal received from the first optical fiber link, as shown in FIG. 6, the second device may also include a photoelectric conversion module 606 and The clock data recovery module 607, the photoelectric conversion module 606 and the clock data recovery module 607 are connected in series between the circulator 603 and the processing module 605. The photoelectric conversion module 606 is used to perform photoelectric conversion on the signal from the circulator 603 and send the photoelectrically converted signal to the clock data recovery module 607; the clock data recovery module 607 is used to perform clock data on the signal from the photoelectric conversion module 606 Resume processing, and send the signal after the clock data recovery processing to the processing module 605. At this time, the processing module 605 may control the second sending module 604 to send the above-mentioned encoded signal based on the signal from the clock data recovery processing module 607.
可选地,图6中的第二设备还可以包括电开关608,处理模块605可以通过电开关608选择第一发送模块601和第二发送模块604中需要控制的模块。Optionally, the second device in FIG. 6 may further include an electric switch 608, and the processing module 605 may use the electric switch 608 to select the modules that need to be controlled among the first sending module 601 and the second sending module 604.
另外,在第二设备需要向第一设备传输数据时,第二设备可以根据需要传输的数据,通过第一光纤链路向第一设备发送承载有该数据的数据信号(属于第一波段外的信号)。示例地,处理模块605可以根据需要传输的数据,控制第二发送模块604向滤波器602发送该数据信号,以便于滤波器602将该数据信号通过第一光纤链路发送至第一设备。In addition, when the second device needs to transmit data to the first device, the second device can send the data signal carrying the data to the first device through the first optical fiber link according to the data that needs to be transmitted (belonging to the data signal outside the first band). Signal). For example, the processing module 605 may control the second sending module 604 to send the data signal to the filter 602 according to the data to be transmitted, so that the filter 602 sends the data signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link.
S105、第一设备根据各个光纤端口的目标信号和编码信号,对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。S105. The first device identifies the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the target signal and the encoded signal of each optical fiber port.
示例地,S105可以包括:For example, S105 may include:
S1051、第一设备确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号。S1051. The first device determines a detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal.
第一设备在接收到上述编码信号后,可以首先对编码信号进行处理,以识别该编码信号中对应第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,光纤端口对应的检测子信号由该光纤端口对应的所有调光单元反射第一波段内的信号后得到。After receiving the above-mentioned encoded signal, the first device may first process the encoded signal to identify the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein, the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port It is obtained by reflecting the signal in the first waveband by all the dimming units corresponding to the fiber port.
可选地,光纤链路上具有每个光纤端口对应的等间距排布的多个目标位置;每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元设置在多个目标位置中的至少部分目标位置上,且至少部分目标位置 包括:多个目标位置中的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置。第一设备在识别编码信号中对应第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号时,可以根据第一波段内的信号在所述多个目标位置中相邻目标位置间的光纤链路上传输所需的时长(称为单位时长),以及每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量,确定编码信号中对应第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号。Optionally, the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged on at least a part of the plurality of target positions, And at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position among the multiple target positions. When the first device identifies the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal, the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the plurality of target positions may be determined based on the signal in the first band The length of time required for the uplink transmission (referred to as the unit time length), and the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port, determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each fiber port on the first fiber link in the encoded signal.
以图1所示的光纤链路a1为第一光纤链路为例,请参考图1和图7,第一设备在识别编码信号中对应第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号时,可以首先对编码信号进行第一个周期的检测。示例地,在每个周期的检测中,第一设备首先检测接收到的编码信号中的第一个高电位(如图7中从左往右的第一个高电位)。在检测到该第一个高电位后,第一设备可以对该编码信号中每隔单位时长的位置进行一次检测,并在第四次检测之后停止检测。在每次检测的过程中,第一设备需要确定该编码信号在当前时刻的电位为高电位还是低电位,在该第四次检测之后第一设备可以根据检测到的第一个高电位,以及这四次检测的结果,生成第一个光纤端口(c1)对应的调光单元所对应的检测子信号,如11111。需要说明的是,第一设备对编码信号中每隔单位时长的位置进行检测的次数可以比每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量小1;图1中以每个光纤端口对应的5个目标位置为例,因此对编码信号中每隔单位时长的位置进行检测的次数为4。Taking the optical fiber link a1 shown in Figure 1 as the first optical fiber link as an example, please refer to Figure 1 and Figure 7. The first device in the identification coded signal corresponds to the detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link At the same time, the first cycle of the coded signal can be detected first. For example, in each cycle of detection, the first device first detects the first high potential in the received encoded signal (the first high potential from left to right in FIG. 7). After detecting the first high potential, the first device may detect the position of the coded signal every unit time, and stop the detection after the fourth detection. In the process of each detection, the first device needs to determine whether the potential of the encoded signal at the current moment is a high potential or a low potential. After the fourth detection, the first device can detect the first high potential according to the first detection, and As a result of these four detections, the detection sub-signal corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the first fiber port (c1) is generated, such as 11111. It should be noted that the number of times that the first device detects positions in the encoded signal every unit of time can be one less than the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port; in Figure 1, there are 5 targets corresponding to each fiber port. The position is taken as an example, so the number of times of detecting the position every unit duration in the coded signal is 4.
之后,在上述第一个周期的检测结束后,第一设备可以继续对该编码信号进行第二个周期的检测,以得到第二个光纤端口(b1)对应的调光单元所对应的检测子信号,如11111。需要说明的是,在该第二个周期的检测结束后,第一设备仍然可以继续对编码信号进行更多周期的检测,直至将该编码信号全部检测完毕。图7对应的编码信号在经过两个周期的检测后,便结束检测。After that, after the detection of the first cycle above, the first device can continue to detect the encoded signal for the second cycle to obtain the detector corresponding to the dimming unit corresponding to the second fiber port (b1) Signal, such as 11111. It should be noted that after the detection of the second cycle ends, the first device can still continue to perform more cycles of detection of the encoded signal until the entire detection of the encoded signal is completed. The coded signal corresponding to Fig. 7 ends the detection after two cycles of detection.
S1052、第一设备根据所述各个光纤端口的目标信号,以及所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。S1052. The first device identifies the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the target signal of each optical fiber port and the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link.
第一设备在得到通信系统中各个光纤端口的目标信号,以及第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号之后,便可以将这两部分信号进行比对,以识别第一光纤链路上的各个光纤端口。After the first device obtains the target signal of each optical fiber port in the communication system and the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, it can compare the two parts of the signal to identify the first optical fiber link Various fiber ports on the road.
示例地,在多个光纤链路相互独立的情况下,在目标方向上,不同光纤链路上相同次序的光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,目标方向包括:靠近或远离第一设备的方向。此时,第一设备不仅需要获取到通信系统中各个光纤端口的目标信号,还需要确定各个光纤端口中每个光纤端口对应的次序。其中,每个光纤端口对应的次序为:在上述目标方向上,该光纤端口在所在的光纤链路上的多个光纤端口中的次序。For example, when multiple fiber links are independent of each other, in the target direction, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the same order of fiber ports on different fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: approaching or away from the first The direction of the device. At this time, the first device not only needs to obtain the target signal of each optical fiber port in the communication system, but also needs to determine the sequence corresponding to each optical fiber port in each optical fiber port. Wherein, the sequence corresponding to each optical fiber port is: in the above-mentioned target direction, the sequence of the optical fiber port among the multiple optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link where it is located.
第一设备在S1052中需要将第一光纤链路上每个次序(在目标方向上的次序)的光纤端口的检测子信号,通信系统中对应该次序的每个光纤端口的目标信号进行比对,以确定该检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律与该目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律是否一致。在目标方向上,若第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口对应的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第一光纤端口的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致时,第一设备将第一光纤链路上该目标次序的光纤端口识别为该第一光纤端口。其中,该第一光纤端口为对应目标次序的任一光纤端口。In S1052, the first device needs to compare the detection sub-signals of the optical fiber ports in each order (order in the target direction) on the first optical fiber link, and compare the target signals of each optical fiber port in the corresponding order in the communication system. To determine whether the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal is consistent with the arrangement rule of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal. In the target direction, if the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal corresponding to the fiber port of the target order on the first fiber link is the same as the arrangement of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first fiber port When the rules are consistent, the first device recognizes the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link as the first optical fiber port. Wherein, the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
仍然以图1所示的通信系统为例,该通信系统中各个光纤端口对应的次序可以如表2所示,表2中以目标方向为靠近设备10的方向为例,此时靠近设备11的光纤端口为第一个光 纤端口。当然,该目标方向也可以是远离设备10的方向,此时靠近设备10的光纤端口为第一个光纤端口,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Still taking the communication system shown in FIG. 1 as an example, the corresponding order of each optical fiber port in the communication system can be as shown in Table 2. In Table 2, the target direction is the direction close to the device 10 as an example. The fiber port is the first fiber port. Of course, the target direction may also be a direction away from the device 10, at this time, the optical fiber port close to the device 10 is the first optical fiber port, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
表2Table 2
光纤端口Fiber port 目标信号Target signal 次序order
b1b1 1111111111 22
b2b2 1110111101 22
b3b3 1101111011 22
b4b4 1011110111 22
b5b5 1100111001 22
b6b6 1001110011 22
b7b7 1010110101 22
b8b8 1000110001 22
c1c1 1111111111 11
c2c2 1110111101 11
c3c3 1101111011 11
c4c4 1011110111 11
c5c5 1100111001 11
c6c6 1001110011 11
c7c7 1010110101 11
c8c8 1000110001 11
根据S1051可知,在目标方向(如靠近设备10的方向)上,光纤链路a1上次序为1的光纤端口对应的检测子信号为11111,光纤链路a1上次序为2的光纤端口对应的检测子信号为11111。第一设备可以将光纤链路a1上次序为1的光纤端口对应的检测子信号11111,与表2中次序1对应的光纤端口c1至c8的目标信号进行比较;以及将光纤链路a1上次序为2的光纤端口对应的检测子信号11111,与表2中次序2对应的光纤端口b1至b8的目标信号进行比较。According to S1051, in the target direction (such as the direction close to the device 10), the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port of the order 1 on the optical fiber link a1 is 11111, and the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port of the order 2 on the optical fiber link a1 The sub signal is 11111. The first device can compare the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port of the order 1 on the optical fiber link a1 with the target signal of the optical fiber ports c1 to c8 corresponding to the order 1 in Table 2; and compare the order on the optical fiber link a1 The detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port of 2 is compared with the target signal of the optical fiber ports b1 to b8 corresponding to order 2 in Table 2.
经过比较可知,光纤链路a1上次序为1的光纤端口对应的检测子信号11111所反映的排布规律,与光纤端口c1的目标信号11111所指示的排布规律相同,因此可以确定光纤链路a1上次序为1的光纤端口为光纤端口c1。光纤链路a1上次序为2的光纤端口对应的检测子信号11111所反映的排布规律,与光纤端口b1的目标信号11111所指示的排布规律相同,因此可以确定光纤链路a1上次序为2的光纤端口为光纤端口b1。所以,在S7502中第一设备可以确定:在靠近设备10的方向上,光纤链路a1上的第一个光纤端口为c1,第二个光纤端口为b1,从而实现了对光纤链路a1上光纤端口的识别。After comparison, it can be seen that the arrangement law reflected by the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port with the order of 1 on the optical fiber link a1 is the same as the arrangement law indicated by the target signal 11111 of the optical fiber port c1, so the optical fiber link can be determined The fiber port with order 1 on a1 is the fiber port c1. The arrangement law reflected by the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the optical fiber port with order 2 on the optical fiber link a1 is the same as the arrangement law indicated by the target signal 11111 of the optical fiber port b1. Therefore, it can be determined that the order on the optical fiber link a1 is The fiber port of 2 is fiber port b1. Therefore, in S7502, the first device can determine that in the direction close to device 10, the first fiber port on the fiber link a1 is c1, and the second fiber port is b1, thereby realizing the connection to the fiber link a1. Identification of fiber ports.
综上所述,本申请实施例提供的端口识别方法中,由于光纤链路上设置有光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同。因此,可以根据来自光纤链路的编码信号确定光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律,进而根据该排布规律对光纤端口进行识别。In summary, in the port identification method provided by the embodiments of the present application, since multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and the arrangement rules of the dimming units on different optical fiber links are different. Therefore, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link can be determined according to the encoded signal from the optical fiber link, and then the optical fiber port can be identified according to the arrangement rule.
并且,本申请实施例中无需改变通信系统的基础架构,仅对通信系统中的部分结构进行轻微的更改,减小了改进成本,降低了工程实施的复杂度,从而方便后期的管理维护。Moreover, in the embodiments of the present application, there is no need to change the basic structure of the communication system, and only minor changes are made to part of the structure of the communication system, which reduces the cost of improvement and the complexity of project implementation, thereby facilitating subsequent management and maintenance.
需要说明的是,图5所示的实施例中以光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,以及多个光纤端口对应的调光单元为例。可选地,光纤链路上也可以仅设置有一个光纤端口,以及该光纤端口对应的调光单元,此时,由于不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同,因此,不同光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同。第一设备可以基于每个光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律,对光纤端口进行识别。It should be noted that, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of optical fiber ports are provided on an optical fiber link, and a dimming unit corresponding to the plurality of optical fiber ports is taken as an example. Optionally, only one fiber port and a dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port may be provided on the fiber link. At this time, because the arrangement of the dimming units on different fiber links is different, different fiber ports The arrangement rules of the corresponding dimming units are different. The first device can identify the fiber port based on the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port.
另外,本申请实施例中,由于能够通过增加调光单元的排布方式,增加能够检测的光纤端口的数量,实现了对光纤链路和光纤端口均较多的通信系统的链路检测,从而能够适用于较为复杂的通信系统。并且,在本申请实施例中,各个调光单元的参数一致,因此,也无需在光纤链路上设置多种不同参数的调光单元;设备发出的第一波段内的信号的波长可以较少(比如唯一),使得设备无需发出多种不同波长的信号。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, since the number of optical fiber ports that can be detected can be increased by increasing the arrangement of the dimming unit, the link detection of the communication system with more optical fiber links and optical fiber ports is realized, thereby It can be applied to more complicated communication systems. Moreover, in the embodiments of the present application, the parameters of each dimming unit are the same. Therefore, there is no need to set multiple dimming units with different parameters on the optical fiber link; the wavelength of the signal in the first band emitted by the device can be less. (Such as unique), so that the device does not need to send out multiple signals of different wavelengths.
基于本申请实施例提供的通信系统可以实现对光纤端口的识别。进一步地,基于对光纤端口的识别结果可以判定设备连接的光纤端口是否正确。相关技术提供了一种利用检测装置对设备连接的光纤端口是否正确的判定方法,但是该方法需要采用额外的检测装置,灵活性较差;而本申请实施例中无需借助额外的检测装置,灵活性较高。相关技术还提供了一种采用纸质标签、电子身份标识(electronic identity,eID)或者射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)技术作为光纤端口的标签标识,之后工作人员通过检测光纤链路的两端的光纤端口上的标签标识,对光纤端口进行识别。但是人工的错误率较高,且效率低下。而本申请实施例中,设备能够自动实现对光纤端口的识别,无需人工参与,提高了自动化程度以及光纤端口的识别效率,减小了错误率。The communication system provided based on the embodiment of the present application can realize the identification of the optical fiber port. Further, based on the identification result of the optical fiber port, it can be determined whether the optical fiber port connected to the device is correct. The related art provides a method for judging whether the optical fiber port connected to the device is correct by using a detection device, but this method requires additional detection devices, which is less flexible; however, in the embodiment of the present application, no additional detection devices are required, which is flexible. High sex. The related technology also provides a way to use paper tags, electronic identification (eID) or radio frequency identification (radio frequency identification, RFID) technology as the label identification of the optical fiber port. The label on the fiber port identifies the fiber port. However, the manual error rate is high and the efficiency is low. In the embodiment of the present application, the device can automatically recognize the optical fiber port without manual participation, which improves the degree of automation and the identification efficiency of the optical fiber port, and reduces the error rate.
进一步地,第一设备可以参考图5所示的端口识别方法,依次对通信系统中每条光纤链路上的端口进行识别,并根据识别出的每条链路上的端口,生成该通信系统的拓扑图。Further, the first device can refer to the port identification method shown in FIG. 5 to identify the ports on each optical fiber link in the communication system in turn, and generate the communication system based on the identified ports on each link Topological diagram.
需要说明的是,图5所示的实施例中以第一设备接收到的来自第一光纤链路的编码信号是第二设备发送的为例。当然,该端口识别方法也可以不包括第二设备执行的操作,如S102、S103和S104,且第一设备在S105之前,需要向第一光纤链路发送第一波段内的信号,并接收第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号,以及将接收到的信号作为上述编码信号。此时,该编码信号的波长可以位于第一波段内,第二设备也可以不包括图6中的第一发送模块601和环形器603,并且第一设备的结构可以参考图6。示例地,第一设备在向第一光纤链路发送第一波段内的信号时,处理模块605可以控制第一发送模块601向环形器603发送第一波段的信号,之后环形器603向滤波器602发送来自第一发送模块601的信号,滤波器602向第一光纤链路发送来自环形器603的信号。第一设备在接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号时,滤波器602接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,并向环形器603发送来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,之后环形器603向处理模块605发送来自滤波器602的编码信号。It should be noted that, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, the coded signal received by the first device from the first optical fiber link is sent by the second device as an example. Of course, the port identification method may not include operations performed by the second device, such as S102, S103, and S104, and the first device needs to send signals in the first band to the first optical fiber link before S105, and receive the first optical fiber link. The signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on an optical fiber link, and the received signal is used as the above-mentioned encoded signal. At this time, the wavelength of the coded signal may be in the first waveband, the second device may not include the first sending module 601 and the circulator 603 in FIG. 6, and the structure of the first device may refer to FIG. 6. For example, when the first device sends a signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link, the processing module 605 may control the first sending module 601 to send the signal in the first band to the circulator 603, and then the circulator 603 sends the signal to the filter 602 sends the signal from the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 sends the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link. When the first device receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, the filter 602 receives the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, and sends the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator 603, and then the circulator 603 The encoded signal from the filter 602 is sent to the processing module 605.
另外,在第一设备需要向第二设备传输数据时,第一设备可以根据需要传输的数据,通过第一光纤链路向第二设备发送承载有该数据的数据信号(属于第一波段外的信号)。示例地,处理模块605可以根据需要传输的数据,控制第二发送模块604向滤波器602发送该数据信号,以便于滤波器602将该数据信号通过第一光纤链路发送至第二设备。In addition, when the first device needs to transmit data to the second device, the first device can send the data signal carrying the data to the second device through the first optical fiber link according to the data that needs to be transmitted (belonging to the data signal outside the first band). Signal). For example, the processing module 605 can control the second sending module 604 to send the data signal to the filter 602 according to the data to be transmitted, so that the filter 602 sends the data signal to the second device through the first optical fiber link.
以上实施例中均以通信系统中多条光纤链路相互独立为例,可选地,该多条光纤链路也可以存在交叠。比如,该多条光纤链路是由多条支路通过级联的方式连接后形成的。In the above embodiments, the multiple optical fiber links in the communication system are independent of each other as an example. Optionally, the multiple optical fiber links may also overlap. For example, the multiple optical fiber links are formed after multiple branches are connected in a cascaded manner.
示例地,如图8所示,设备10连接有多级支路,该多级支路中的每级支路包括多条支路,图8中以多级支路包括第1级支路和第2级支路,且每级支路包括8条支路为例。其中,第1级支路包括:支路a11至支路a18,第2级支路包括:支路a21至支路a28,支路a31至支路a38,支路a41至支路a48,支路a51至支路a58,支路a61至支路a68,支路a71至支路a78,支路a81至支路a88,以及支路a91至支路a98。For example, as shown in FIG. 8, the device 10 is connected to a multi-level branch. Each level of the multi-level branch includes multiple branches. In FIG. 8, the multi-level branch includes the first-level branch and Take the second level branch, and each level of branch includes 8 branches as an example. Among them, the first-level branch includes: branch a11 to branch a18, the second-level branch includes: branch a21 to branch a28, branch a31 to branch a38, branch a41 to branch a48, branch A51 to branch a58, branch a61 to branch a68, branch a71 to branch a78, branch a81 to branch a88, and branch a91 to branch a98.
在该多级支路中,每条第1级支路均与设备10连接,每条支路与多条下一级支路连接,且不同支路连接的下一级支路不同。请参考图8,支路a11至支路a18中的每条支路(第1级支路)均与8条第2级支路连接,且支路a11至支路a18所连接的第2级支路不同。其中,支路a11连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a21至支路a28;支路a12连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a31至支路a38;支路a31连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a41至支路a48;支路a41连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a51至支路a58;支路a51连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a61至支路a68;支路a61连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a71至支路a78;支路a71连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a81至支路a88;支路a81连接的8条第2级支路包括:支路a91至支路a98。In the multi-level branch, each first-level branch is connected to the device 10, and each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches, and the next-level branches connected to different branches are different. Please refer to Figure 8, each branch (first-level branch) from branch a11 to branch a18 is connected to 8 second-level branches, and branch a11 to branch a18 are connected to the second-level branch The branches are different. Among them, the eight second-level branches connected by branch a11 include: branch a21 to branch a28; the eight second-level branches connected by branch a12 include: branch a31 to branch a38; branch a31 is connected The 8 second-level branches include: branch a41 to branch a48; the 8 second-level branches connected by branch a41 include: branch a51 to branch a58; the 8 second-level branches connected by branch a51 Branch roads include: branch a61 to branch a68; the eight second-level branches connected by branch a61 include: branch a71 to branch a78; the eight second-level branches connected by branch a71 include: branch A81 to branch a88; the 8 second-level branches connected by branch a81 include: branch a91 to branch a98.
可选地,通信系统中各个支路之间可以通过如图8所示的分路器连接。Optionally, each branch in the communication system may be connected by a splitter as shown in FIG. 8.
通信系统中的每条光纤链路包括:上述多级支路中每级支路中的一条支路。比如,支路a11与支路a21可以用于形成一条光纤链路,支路a11与支路a28可以用于形成一条光纤链路,以此类推,图8中的每个第1级支路与连接的8条第2级支路共用于形成8条光纤链路,图8中的两级支路共用于形成64条光纤链路。Each optical fiber link in the communication system includes: one branch of each level of the above-mentioned multi-level branch. For example, branch a11 and branch a21 can be used to form an optical fiber link, branch a11 and branch a28 can be used to form an optical fiber link, and so on, each of the first-level branch in Figure 8 and The 8 second-level branches connected are used to form a total of 8 optical fiber links, and the two-level branches in Figure 8 are used to form a total of 64 optical fiber links.
对于多级支路中的每个最后一级支路,该支路可以连接至一个设备,不同最后一级支路所连接的设备可以相同也可以不同。请继续参考图8,最后一级支路为第2级支路,64个第二级支路与64个设备一一对应连接,其中,这64个设备包括:设备11至设备18,设备21至设备28,设备31至设备38,设备41至设备48,设备51至设备58,设备61至设备68,设备71至设备78,以及设备81至设备88。当然,不同最后一级支路所连接的设备也可以相同,比如类似图1,图8中的所有第2级支路也可以均连接至设备11(图8中未示出)。For each last-level branch in the multi-level branch, the branch can be connected to one device, and the devices connected to different last-level branches may be the same or different. Please continue to refer to Figure 8. The last level branch is the second level branch. 64 second level branches are connected to 64 devices one-to-one. Among them, the 64 devices include: device 11 to device 18, and device 21 To device 28, device 31 to device 38, device 41 to device 48, device 51 to device 58, device 61 to device 68, device 71 to device 78, and device 81 to device 88. Of course, the devices connected to the different last-level branches can also be the same. For example, similar to FIG. 1, all the second-level branches in FIG. 8 can also be connected to the device 11 (not shown in FIG. 8).
进一步地,通信系统中的每条光纤链路上均可以设置有光纤端口,以及光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同。在各个光纤链路存在交叠的情况下,光纤链路上设置的光纤端口包括:该光纤链路中每级支路上靠近第1级支路所连接的设备的光纤端口。如图8所示,支路a11和支路a21所在的光纤链路上的光纤端口包括:支路a11上靠近设备10的光纤端口b1,以及支路a21上靠近设备10的光纤端口c21。Further, each optical fiber link in the communication system may be provided with an optical fiber port and multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different. In the case of overlapping of various optical fiber links, the optical fiber ports provided on the optical fiber links include: the optical fiber ports of each branch in the optical fiber link that are close to the equipment connected to the first branch. As shown in FIG. 8, the optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link where the branch a11 and the branch a21 are located include: the optical fiber port b1 on the branch a11 close to the device 10 and the optical fiber port c21 on the branch a21 close to the device 10.
可选地,本申请实施例提供的通信系统可以是无源光网络(passive optical network,PON)系统或者其他通信系统,只要通信系统包括通过多条光纤链路连接的设备即可。在各个光纤链路存在交叠的情况下,若通信系统是PON系统,则该通信系统中的设备可以包括:PON系统中通过多条光纤链路连接的设备,比如OLT和多个ONT。Optionally, the communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a passive optical network (PON) system or other communication system, as long as the communication system includes devices connected through multiple optical fiber links. In the case of overlapping optical fiber links, if the communication system is a PON system, the equipment in the communication system may include: equipment connected through multiple optical fiber links in the PON system, such as an OLT and multiple ONTs.
在各个光纤链路存在交叠的情况下,也可以参考各个光纤链路相互独立的情况,通过在多条光纤链路中的每条光纤链路上设置光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,以实现对光纤链路上光纤端口的识别以及对光纤链路的故障检测。In the case of overlapping of various optical fiber links, you can also refer to the situation that each optical fiber link is independent of each other, by setting multiple dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port on each of the multiple optical fiber links, In order to realize the identification of the fiber port on the fiber link and the fault detection of the fiber link.
每条光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元可以设置在该光纤端口的附近。每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与该光纤端口的距离小于距离阈值,且在光纤链路设置有多个光纤端口时,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与其他光纤端口的距离大于或等于距离阈值。示例地,图8中光纤端口b1对应的多个调光单元包括:支路a11上靠近光纤端口b1的5个调光单元,光纤端口a21对应的多个调光单元包括:支路a21上靠近光纤端口a21的5个调光单元,光纤端口c28对应的多个调光单元包括:支路a28上靠近光纤端口c28的4个调光单元。Multiple dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link can be arranged near the optical fiber port. The distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port and the fiber port is less than the distance threshold, and when the fiber link is provided with multiple fiber ports, the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each fiber port and other fiber ports is greater than or equal to Distance threshold. For example, the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port b1 in FIG. 8 include: 5 dimming units on the branch a11 close to the fiber port b1, and the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port a21 include: The five dimming units of the fiber port a21, and the multiple dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c28 include: 4 dimming units on the branch a28 close to the fiber port c28.
可选地,在多条光纤链路存在交叠的情况下,每个光纤端口对应的至少部分调光单元位于该光纤端口所在的支路上。比如图8中以每个光纤端口对应的所有调光单元均位于该光纤端口所在的支路上为例。当然,也可以是每个光纤端口对应的一部分调光单元位于该光纤端口所在的支路上,而另一部分调光单元位于该支路外。比如,如图8所示,多条第1级支路均通过初始支路a0与第一设备连接,在图8的基础上,如图9所示,可以将每个调光单元对应的多个调光单元中的一部分调光单元(如4个调光单元)设置在该光纤端口所在的支路上,而将另一部分调光单元(如1个调光单元)设置在该光纤端口连接的支路上。其中,第1级支路上的光纤端口所连接的支路为初始支路,非第1级支路上的光纤端口连接的支路为该支路的前一级支路。Optionally, in the case that multiple optical fiber links overlap, at least part of the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located. For example, in FIG. 8, it is taken as an example that all the dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located. Of course, it is also possible that a part of the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located, and another part of the dimming unit is located outside the branch. For example, as shown in Figure 8, multiple first-level branches are connected to the first device through the initial branch a0. On the basis of Figure 8, as shown in Figure 9, each dimming unit can be corresponding to multiple A part of the dimming unit (such as 4 dimming units) is set on the branch where the optical fiber port is located, and another part of the dimming unit (such as 1 dimming unit) is set on the branch where the optical fiber port is connected. Branch road. Among them, the branch connected to the optical fiber port on the first-level branch is the initial branch, and the branch connected to the optical fiber port on the non-first-level branch is the previous branch of the branch.
每条光纤链路上具有与每个光纤端口对应的多个目标位置,且该多个目标位置等间距排布;每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元设置在该光纤端口对应的至少部分目标位置上,且该至少部分目标位置包括:该光纤端口对应的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置。Each optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port, and the plurality of target positions are arranged at equal intervals; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged at least part of the corresponding optical fiber port At the target position, and the at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position corresponding to the optical fiber port.
多条光纤链路中不同光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律不同。如图8中64条光纤链路上调光单元的排布规律互不相同。示例地,不同第1级支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,同一支路连接的多条支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同。例如,如图8所示,八个第1级支路a11至a18上的八个光纤端口b1至b8对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,比如,b1对应的调光单元的排布规律可以表示为11111,b2对应的调光单元的排布规律可以表示为11101。第2级支路a21至a28上八个光纤端口c21至c28对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,比如,c21对应的调光单元的排布规律可以表示为11111,c28对应的调光单元的排布规律可以表示为11101。可以看出,在本申请实施例中,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元具有独特的排布规律,因此,可以基于该排布规律实现对光纤链路进行光纤端口识别或故障检测。The arrangement rules of dimming units on different optical fiber links in multiple optical fiber links are different. As shown in Figure 8, the arrangement of the dimming units on the 64 optical fiber links is different from each other. For example, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on different first-level branches are different, and the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to the same branch are different. For example, as shown in Figure 8, the eight optical fiber ports b1 to b8 on the eight first-level branches a11 to a18 have different arrangements of dimming units, for example, the arrangement of dimming units corresponding to b1 It can be expressed as 11111, and the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to b2 can be expressed as 11101. The arrangement of the dimming units corresponding to the eight fiber ports c21 to c28 on the second-level branch a21 to a28 is different. For example, the arrangement of the dimming unit corresponding to c21 can be expressed as 11111, and the dimming unit corresponding to c28 The arrangement rule of can be expressed as 11101. It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port has a unique arrangement rule. Therefore, the optical fiber port identification or fault detection of the optical fiber link can be realized based on the arrangement rule.
又进一步地,在光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,以及每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元时,光纤链路上对应同一光纤端口的不同调光单元的间距较小,光纤链路上对应不同光纤端口的不同调光单元的间距较大。如图8所示,支路a11和支路a21所在的光纤链路上,光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元的间距均较小,但该光纤链路上光纤端口b1对应的5个调光单元与光纤端口c21对应的5个调光单元的间距较大。Furthermore, when multiple optical fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and multiple dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port, the distance between different dimming units corresponding to the same optical fiber port on the optical fiber link is small, and the optical fiber chain The distance between different dimming units corresponding to different fiber ports on the road is relatively large. As shown in Figure 8, on the optical fiber link where branch a11 and branch a21 are located, the distance between the five dimming units corresponding to fiber port b1 is relatively small, but the five dimming units corresponding to fiber port b1 on the optical fiber link The distance between the light unit and the 5 dimming units corresponding to the fiber port c21 is relatively large.
本申请实施例中的调光单元可以参考多条光纤链路相互独立的实施例中的调光单元,本申请实施例在此不做赘述。For the dimming unit in the embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the dimming unit in the embodiment where multiple optical fiber links are independent of each other, and details are not described in the embodiment of the present application.
基于本申请实施例提供的各条光纤链路存在交叠的通信系统(如图8或图9所示的通信系统),本申请实施例提供了一种用于该通信系统的光纤端口识别方法。示例地,该光纤端口识别方法可以参考图5所示的光纤端口识别方法,也是由第二设备向第一设备发送编码信号, 之后在由第一设备根据各个光纤端口的目标信号,以及该编码信号,对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。但此时,第一设备对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别的过程,与图5所示的实施例中第一设备对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别的过程不同。Based on the communication system in which each optical fiber link provided by the embodiment of the present application overlaps (the communication system shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9), the embodiment of the present application provides an optical fiber port identification method for the communication system . For example, the optical fiber port identification method can refer to the optical fiber port identification method shown in FIG. Signal to identify the fiber port on the first fiber link. However, at this time, the process in which the first device recognizes the fiber port on the first fiber link is different from the process in which the first device recognizes the fiber port on the first fiber link in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
示例地,各条光纤链路存在交叠的情况下,第一设备在对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别前,还需要确定每个光纤端口对应的端口组。其中,每个第1级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:该光纤端口;每个第i级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:该光纤端口,以及该光纤端口连接的前i-1级支路上的光纤端口,i≥2。For example, in the case where the optical fiber links overlap, the first device needs to determine the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port before identifying the optical fiber ports on the first optical fiber link. Wherein, the port group corresponding to the fiber port on each level 1 branch includes: the fiber port; the port group corresponding to the fiber port on each level i branch includes: the fiber port and the front i connected to the fiber port -1 fiber port on the branch, i≥2.
第一设备在对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别时,可以将第一光纤链路上靠近第一设备的前j个光纤端口的检测子信号,与每个光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号进行比对。其中,每个光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号可以由:该端口组中各个光纤端口的目标信号按照这些光纤端口的排布顺序依次排布而成。当第一光纤链路上靠近第一设备的前j个光纤端口的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第二光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致时,第一设备可以将第一光纤链路上靠近第一设备的第j个光纤端口识别为该第二光纤端口。其中,该第二光纤端口为多条光纤链路上的任一光纤端口。When the first device recognizes the fiber port on the first fiber link, it can combine the detection sub-signals of the first j fiber ports on the first fiber link close to the first device to the port group corresponding to each fiber port The target signal is compared. Wherein, the target signal of the port group corresponding to each fiber port may be formed by sequentially arranging the target signals of each fiber port in the port group according to the arrangement order of the fiber ports. When the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signals of the first j fiber ports close to the first device on the first fiber link, the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the port group corresponding to the second fiber port When the arrangement rules of are consistent, the first device may recognize the j-th optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link that is close to the first device as the second optical fiber port. Wherein, the second optical fiber port is any optical fiber port on multiple optical fiber links.
以图8所示的通信系统为例,图8中示出的各个光纤端口的目标信号,光纤端口对应的端口组,以及端口组的目标信号均可以如表3所示。需要说明的是,图8中有部分光纤端口通过省略号表示且并未示出,表3中并未示出这些光纤端口的目标信号、这些光纤端口对应的端口组,以及这些端口组的目标信号。Taking the communication system shown in FIG. 8 as an example, the target signal of each fiber port shown in FIG. 8, the port group corresponding to the fiber port, and the target signal of the port group can all be as shown in Table 3. It should be noted that some fiber ports in Figure 8 are indicated by ellipses and are not shown. Table 3 does not show the target signals of these fiber ports, the port groups corresponding to these fiber ports, and the target signals of these port groups. .
表3table 3
光纤端口Fiber port 光纤端口的目标信号Target signal of fiber port 端口组Port group 端口组的目标信号Target signal of the port group
b1b1 1111111111 b1b1 1111111111
b2b2 1110111101 b2b2 1110111101
b3b3 1101111011 b3b3 1101111011
b4b4 1100111001 b4b4 1100111001
b5b5 1011110111 b5b5 1011110111
b6b6 1110111101 b6b6 1110111101
b7b7 1001110011 b7b7 1001110011
b8b8 1000110001 b8b8 1000110001
c21c21 1111111111 b1、c21b1, c21 11111111111111111111
c28c28 1110111101 b1、c28b1, c28 11111111011111111101
c31c31 1110111101 b2、c31b2, c31 11101111011110111101
c38c38 1101111011 b2、c38b2, c38 11101110111110111011
c41c41 1101111011 b3、c41b3, c41 11011110111101111011
c48c48 1100111001 b3、c48b3, c48 11011110011101111001
c51c51 1100111001 b4、c51b4, c51 11001110011100111001
c58c58 1011110111 b4、c58b4, c58 11001101111100110111
c61c61 1011110111 b5、c61b5, c61 10111101111011110111
c68c68 1010110101 b5、c68b5, c68 10111101011011110101
c71c71 1010110101 b6、c71b6, c71 11101101011110110101
c78c78 1001110011 b6、c78b6, c78 11101100111110110011
c81c81 1001110011 b7、c81b7, c81 10011100111001110011
c88c88 1000110001 b7、c88b7, c88 10011100011001110001
c91c91 1111111111 b8、c91b8, c91 10001111111000111111
c98c98 1000110001 b8、c98b8, c98 10001100011000110001
假设第一光纤链路包括:初始支路a0、支路a11以及支路a21,第一设备为设备10,第二设备为设备11。若编码信号的时序图也如图7所示,则根据S1051可知,第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的第1个光纤端口对应的检测子信号为11111,第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的第2个光纤端口对应的检测子信号为11111。第一设备可以将第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的第1个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,与表3中每个端口组的目标信号进行比较;以及第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的前两个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,也与表3中每个端口组的目标信号进行比较。Assuming that the first optical fiber link includes: an initial branch a0, a branch a11, and a branch a21, the first device is the device 10, and the second device is the device 11. If the timing diagram of the encoded signal is also shown in Figure 7, it can be known from S1051 that the detection sub-signal corresponding to the first optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link close to the device 10 is 11111, and the first optical fiber link close to the device 10 The detection sub-signal corresponding to the second fiber port of is 11111. The first device may compare the detection sub-signal corresponding to the first optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link close to the device 10 with the target signal of each port group in Table 3; and the first optical fiber link close to the device 10 The detection sub-signals corresponding to the first two optical fiber ports are also compared with the target signals of each port group in Table 3.
经过比较可知,第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的第1个光纤端口对应的检测子信号11111所反映的排布规律,与光纤端口b1对应的端口组的目标信号11111所指示的排布规律相同,因此可以确定第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的第1个光纤端口为光纤端口b1。第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的前两个光纤端口对应的检测子信号1111111111所反映的排布规律,与光纤端口c21对应的端口组(b1、c21)的目标信号1111111111所指示的排布规律相同,因此可以确定第一光纤链路上靠近设备10的第2个光纤端口为光纤端口c21。从而实现了对第一光纤链路上光纤端口的识别。After comparison, it can be seen that the arrangement rule reflected by the detection sub-signal 11111 corresponding to the first optical fiber port close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link, and the arrangement rule indicated by the target signal 11111 of the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port b1 The same, therefore, it can be determined that the first optical fiber port close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link is the optical fiber port b1. The arrangement rule reflected by the detection sub-signals 1111111111 corresponding to the first two optical fiber ports close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link, and the arrangement indicated by the target signal 1111111111 of the port group (b1, c21) corresponding to the optical fiber port c21 The rule is the same, so it can be determined that the second optical fiber port close to the device 10 on the first optical fiber link is the optical fiber port c21. Thus, the identification of the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link is realized.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,第一设备也可以获取多条光纤链路中每条光纤链路的参考信号,并根据该多条光纤链路的参考信号和该编码信号,对第一光纤链路进行故障检测。其中,光纤链路的参考信号用于指示:该光纤链路上所有调光单元的排布规律。在编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与该多条光纤链路的参考信号所指示的排布规律均不同时,第一设备可以确定第一光纤链路故障。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first device may also obtain the reference signal of each optical fiber link among the multiple optical fiber links, and perform a calculation on the first device according to the reference signal of the multiple optical fiber links and the encoded signal. A fiber link performs fault detection. Among them, the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link. When the arrangement law of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement law indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, the first device can determine that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
一方面,以图1所示的通信系统为例,该通信系统中各个光纤链路的参考信号可以如表4所示,第一设备可以将上述编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律与每个参考信号所指示的排布规律进行比较。需要说明的是,若第一光纤链路并未故障,则该编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律会与表4中某一参考信号所指示的排布规律相同。若该编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律与所有参考信号所指示的排布规律均不相同,则第一设备可以确定第一光纤链路故障。On the one hand, taking the communication system shown in FIG. 1 as an example, the reference signal of each optical fiber link in the communication system can be as shown in Table 4. The first device can adjust the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the above-mentioned coded signal Compare with the arrangement rule indicated by each reference signal. It should be noted that if the first optical fiber link is not faulty, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the coded signal will be the same as the arrangement rule indicated by a reference signal in Table 4. If the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement rule indicated by all reference signals, the first device can determine that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
表4Table 4
光纤链路Fiber optic link 参考信号Reference signal
a1a1 11111111111111111111
a2a2 11101111011110111101
a3a3 11011110111101111011
a4a4 10111101111011110111
a5a5 11001110011100111001
a6a6 10011100111001110011
a7a7 10101101011010110101
a8a8 10001100011000110001
比如,如图10所示,假设第一光纤链路为光纤链路a1,且光纤链路a1上两部分调光单元之间的部分故障,且该部分无法传输任何信号;第一波段内的信号由图10中的设备11发出,且设备11能够根据光纤链路a1上调光单元反射的信号向设备10发送编码信号。由于光纤链路a1上故障的部分无法传输信号,因此,设备11发出的第一波段内的信号只能传输至端口c1对应的5个调光单元,而无法传输至端口b1对应的5个调光单元。设备11发出的编码信号反映端口c1对应的5个调光单元的排布规律,且设备11发出的编码信号也无法传输至设备10。因此,设备10由于无法接收到任何信号,因此可以认为接收到的编码信号为0000000000,该编码信号用于指示光纤链路a1上并未排布有任何调光单元。该编码信号与表4中每个参考信号均不同,因此第一设备可以判定光纤链路a1故障。For example, as shown in Figure 10, suppose that the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1, and a part of the optical fiber link a1 between the two dimming units is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal; The signal is sent by the device 11 in FIG. 10, and the device 11 can send an encoded signal to the device 10 according to the signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1. Because the faulty part of the optical fiber link a1 cannot transmit signals, the signals in the first band sent by the device 11 can only be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c1, but cannot be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port b1. Light unit. The coded signal sent by the device 11 reflects the arrangement rule of the five dimming units corresponding to the port c1, and the coded signal sent by the device 11 cannot be transmitted to the device 10 either. Therefore, because the device 10 cannot receive any signal, it can be considered that the received coded signal is 0000000000, and the coded signal is used to indicate that no dimming unit is arranged on the optical fiber link a1. The coded signal is different from each reference signal in Table 4, so the first device can determine that the optical fiber link a1 is faulty.
又比如,如图10所示,假设第一光纤链路为光纤链路a1,且光纤链路a1上两部分调光单元之间的部分故障,且该部分无法传输任何信号;第一波段内的信号由图10中的设备10发出,且设备10能够接收到光纤链路a1上调光单元反射的编码信号。由于光纤链路a1上故障的部分无法传输信号,因此,设备10发出的第一波段内的信号只能传输至端口b1对应的5个调光单元,而无法传输至端口c1对应的5个调光单元。设备10接收到的编码信号为1111100000,反映端口b1对应的5个调光单元的排布规律。该编码信号与表4中每个参考信号均不同,因此第一设备可以判定光纤链路a1故障。For another example, as shown in Figure 10, suppose that the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1, and there is a partial failure between the two parts of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1, and this part cannot transmit any signal; in the first band The signal of is sent by the device 10 in FIG. 10, and the device 10 can receive the encoded signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1. Since the faulty part of the optical fiber link a1 cannot transmit signals, the signals in the first band sent by the device 10 can only be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port b1, but cannot be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c1. Light unit. The coded signal received by the device 10 is 1111100000, which reflects the arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the port b1. The coded signal is different from each reference signal in Table 4, so the first device can determine that the optical fiber link a1 is faulty.
可选地,第一设备在确定第一光纤链路故障之后,还可以根据该编码信号确定第一光纤链路中故障的链路段。Optionally, after determining that the first optical fiber link is faulty, the first device may also determine the faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
以图10为例,假设第一光纤链路为光纤链路a1,且光纤链路a1上两部分调光单元之间的部分故障,且该部分无法传输任何信号;第一波段内的信号由图10中的设备10发出,且设备10能够接收到光纤链路a1上调光单元反射的编码信号。如前所述,设备10接收到的编码信号为1111100000,反映端口b1对应的5个调光单元的排布规律。将该编码信号与表4中的参考信号进行比较可知,该编码信号与光纤链路a1对应的参考信号1111111111相似度最高,并且设备10可以确定光纤链路a1上靠近设备10的第五个调光单元和第六个调光单元之间的链路段故障。Taking Figure 10 as an example, suppose that the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1, and there is a partial failure between the two parts of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1, and this part cannot transmit any signal; the signal in the first band is determined by The device 10 in FIG. 10 sends out, and the device 10 can receive the encoded signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1. As mentioned above, the coded signal received by the device 10 is 1111100000, which reflects the arrangement rule of the 5 dimming units corresponding to the port b1. Comparing the coded signal with the reference signal in Table 4, it can be seen that the coded signal has the highest similarity with the reference signal 11111111111 corresponding to the fiber link a1, and the device 10 can determine the fifth tone on the fiber link a1 that is close to the device 10 The link section between the optical unit and the sixth dimming unit is faulty.
以图11为例,假设第一光纤链路为光纤链路a1,且光纤链路a1上端口b1对应的5个调光单元中,靠近端口b1的第三个调光单元和第四个调光单元之间的部分故障,且该部分无法传输任何信号;第一波段内的信号由图11中的设备10发出,且设备10能够接收到光纤链路a1上调光单元反射的编码信号。则设备10发出的第一波段内的信号只能传输至靠近端口b1的前三个调光单元,而无法传输至靠近端口b1的后两个调光单元,以及端口c1对应的五个调光单元。设备10接收到的编码信号为1110000000,将该编码信号与表4中的参考信号进行比较可知,该编码信号与光纤链路a1对应的参考信号1111111111相似度最高,并且设备 10可以确定光纤链路a1中位于该第三个调光单元和第四个调光单元之间的链路段故障。Taking Figure 11 as an example, suppose that the first optical fiber link is optical fiber link a1, and among the five dimming units corresponding to port b1 on optical fiber link a1, the third dimming unit and the fourth dimming unit near port b1 Part of the optical unit is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal; the signal in the first band is sent by the device 10 in FIG. 11, and the device 10 can receive the encoded signal reflected by the dimming unit on the optical fiber link a1. Therefore, the signal in the first band sent by the device 10 can only be transmitted to the first three dimming units close to the port b1, but cannot be transmitted to the last two dimming units close to the port b1, and the five dimming units corresponding to the port c1. unit. The coded signal received by the device 10 is 1110000000. Comparing the coded signal with the reference signal in Table 4 shows that the coded signal has the highest similarity with the reference signal 11111111111 corresponding to the fiber link a1, and the device 10 can determine the fiber link The link segment between the third dimming unit and the fourth dimming unit in a1 is faulty.
另一方面,以图9所示的通信系统为例,图9中示出的各个光纤链路的参考信号可以如表5所示,第一设备可以将上述编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律与每个参考信号所指示的排布规律进行比较。需要说明的是,若第一光纤链路并未故障,则该编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律会与表5中某一参考信号所指示的排布规律相同。若该编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律与所有参考信号所指示的排布规律均不相同,则第一设备可以确定第一光纤链路故障。On the other hand, taking the communication system shown in FIG. 9 as an example, the reference signal of each optical fiber link shown in FIG. 9 may be as shown in Table 5. The arrangement rule is compared with the arrangement rule indicated by each reference signal. It should be noted that if the first optical fiber link is not faulty, the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the coded signal will be the same as the arrangement rule indicated by a reference signal in Table 5. If the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement rule indicated by all reference signals, the first device can determine that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
表5table 5
光纤链路Fiber optic link 参考信号Reference signal
支路a0、支路a11、支路a21Branch a0, branch a11, branch a21 11111111111111111111
支路a0、支路a11、支路a28Branch a0, branch a11, branch a28 11111111011111111101
支路a0、支路a12、支路a31Branch a0, branch a12, branch a31 11101111011110111101
支路a0、支路a12、支路a38Branch a0, branch a12, branch a38 11101110111110111011
支路a0、支路a13、支路a41Branch a0, branch a13, branch a41 11011110111101111011
支路a0、支路a13、支路a48Branch a0, branch a13, branch a48 11011110011101111001
支路a0、支路a14、支路a51Branch a0, branch a14, branch a51 11001110011100111001
支路a0、支路a14、支路a58Branch a0, branch a14, branch a58 11001101111100110111
支路a0、支路a15、支路a61Branch a0, branch a15, branch a61 10111101111011110111
支路a0、支路a15、支路a68Branch a0, branch a15, branch a68 10111101011011110101
支路a0、支路a16、支路a71Branch a0, branch a16, branch a71 11101101011110110101
支路a0、支路a16、支路a78Branch a0, branch a16, branch a78 11101100111110110011
支路a0、支路a17、支路a81Branch a0, branch a17, branch a81 10011100111001110011
支路a0、支路a17、支路a88Branch a0, branch a17, branch a88 10011100011001110001
支路a0、支路a18、支路a91Branch a0, branch a18, branch a91 10001111111000111111
支路a0、支路a18、支路a98Branch a0, branch a18, branch a98 10001100011000110001
比如,如图12所示,假设第一光纤链路包括支路a0、支路a11和支路a21,且第一光纤链路上两部分调光单元(光纤端口b1对应的调光单元和光纤端口c21对应的调光单元)之间的部分故障,且该部分无法传输任何信号;第一波段内的信号由图12中的设备11发出,且设备11能够根据第一光纤链路上调光单元反射的信号向设备10发送编码信号。由于第一光纤链路上故障的部分无法传输信号,因此,设备11发出的第一波段内的信号只能传输至端口c21对应的5个调光单元,而无法传输至端口b1对应的5个调光单元。设备11发出的编码信号反映端口c21对应的5个调光单元的排布规律,且设备11发出的编码信号也无法传输至设备10,因此,设备10由于无法接收到任何信号,因此可以认为接收到的编码信号为0000000000,该编码信号用于指示第一光纤链路上并未排布有任何调光单元。该编码信号与表5中每个参考信号均不同,因此第一设备可以判定第一光纤链路故障。For example, as shown in Figure 12, suppose that the first optical fiber link includes branch a0, branch a11, and branch a21, and two parts of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link (the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port b1 and the fiber The part of the dimming unit corresponding to port c21 is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal; the signal in the first band is sent by the device 11 in FIG. 12, and the device 11 can dimming according to the first optical fiber link The signal reflected by the unit sends an encoded signal to the device 10. Since the faulty part of the first optical fiber link cannot transmit signals, the signals in the first band sent by device 11 can only be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c21, but cannot be transmitted to the 5 dimming units corresponding to port b1. Dimming unit. The coded signal sent by the device 11 reflects the arrangement of the 5 dimming units corresponding to port c21, and the coded signal sent by the device 11 cannot be transmitted to the device 10. Therefore, because the device 10 cannot receive any signal, it can be regarded as receiving The obtained coded signal is 0000000000, which is used to indicate that no dimming unit is arranged on the first optical fiber link. The coded signal is different from each reference signal in Table 5, so the first device can determine that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
可选地,第一设备在确定第一光纤链路故障之后,还可以根据该编码信号确定第一光纤链路中故障的链路段。Optionally, after determining that the first optical fiber link is faulty, the first device may also determine the faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
以图12为例,假设第一光纤链路包括支路a0、支路a11和支路a21,且第一光纤链路上两部分调光单元(光纤端口b1对应的调光单元和光纤端口c21对应的调光单元)之间的部分故障,且该部分无法传输任何信号;第一波段内的信号由图12中的设备11发出,且设备11能够根据第一光纤链路上调光单元反射的信号向设备10发送编码信号。如前所述,设备10接收到的编码信号为0000000000。若设备11至设备18均向设备10发送了编码信号,且这些编码信号均为0000000000,此时,设备10可以确定设备11至设备18连接的8条光纤链路中共用的链路段(支路a11)故障。Taking Figure 12 as an example, suppose that the first optical fiber link includes branch a0, branch a11, and branch a21, and there are two parts of the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link (the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port b1 and the fiber port c21. The part of the corresponding dimming unit) is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal; the signal in the first band is sent by the device 11 in FIG. 12, and the device 11 can reflect on the dimming unit according to the first optical fiber link. The signal sends an encoded signal to the device 10. As mentioned earlier, the coded signal received by the device 10 is 0000000000. If devices 11 to 18 have all sent coded signals to device 10, and these coded signals are all 0000000000, then device 10 can determine the common link segment (support Road a11) failure.
以图13为例,假设第一光纤链路包括支路a0、支路a11和支路a21,且支路a21上的某一部分故障,且该部分无法传输任何信号;第一波段内的信号由图13中的设备11发出,且设备11能够根据第一光纤链路上调光单元反射的信号向设备10发送编码信号。设备10接收到的编码信号为0000000000。若设备18也向设备10发送了编码信号,且设备18发送的编码信号为1111111101,该编码信号与表5中的参考信号1111111101相同。此时,设备10可以确定支路a0、支路a11以及支路a28所在的光纤链路并未故障,但支路a0、支路a11以及支路a21所在的光纤链路故障,进而可以确定支路a21为故障的链路段。Taking Figure 13 as an example, suppose that the first optical fiber link includes branch a0, branch a11, and branch a21, and a certain part of branch a21 is faulty, and this part cannot transmit any signal; the signal in the first band is determined by The device 11 in FIG. 13 sends out, and the device 11 can send an encoded signal to the device 10 according to the signal reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link. The coded signal received by the device 10 is 0000000000. If the device 18 also sends an encoded signal to the device 10, and the encoded signal sent by the device 18 is 1111111101, the encoded signal is the same as the reference signal 1111111101 in Table 5. At this time, the device 10 can determine that the optical fiber link where the branch a0, the branch a11, and the branch a28 are located is not faulty, but the optical fiber link where the branch a0, the branch a11, and the branch a21 are located is faulty, and then the branch can be determined Road a21 is the faulty link segment.
可以看出,当光纤链路未故障时,该光纤链路上的每个调光单元均能够反射第一波段的信号。当光纤链路故障时,至少部分调光单元无法反射第一波段的信号。来自光纤链路的编码信号能够反映该光纤链路上调光单元对第一波段的信号的反射情况,因此,第一设备能够基于编码信号,确定光纤链路是否故障,以及定位光纤链路中故障的链路段,从而实现对光纤链路的故障检测。It can be seen that when the optical fiber link is not faulty, each dimming unit on the optical fiber link can reflect the signal of the first band. When the optical fiber link fails, at least part of the dimming unit cannot reflect the first waveband signal. The coded signal from the optical fiber link can reflect the reflection of the signal in the first band by the dimming unit of the optical fiber link. Therefore, the first device can determine whether the optical fiber link is faulty based on the coded signal and locate the optical fiber link. The faulty link segment, so as to realize the fault detection of the optical fiber link.
相关技术提供了一种利用“暗光纤”对光纤链路进行故障检测的方法。该方法需要在光纤链路附近设置一根暗光纤,暗光纤不与任何设备连接。在需要检测光纤链路是否故障时,工作人员可以对该暗光纤的性能进行测试,以确定暗光纤是否出现故障。当确定该暗光纤故障时,确定该光纤链路故障。但是设置暗光纤会占用一定的光纤资源,在光纤资源比较紧张的地区无法适用,且需要工作人员对暗光纤进行性能测试,因此,自动化程度低、错误率高且效率低。而本申请实施例提供的方法中,设备能够自动对光纤链路进行故障检测,自动化程度较高、正确率较高且效率较高,并且无需设置暗光纤,避免了光纤资源的浪费。The related technology provides a method for fault detection of optical fiber links by using "dark optical fibers". This method requires a dark optical fiber to be set near the optical fiber link, and the dark optical fiber is not connected to any equipment. When it is necessary to detect whether the optical fiber link is faulty, the staff can test the performance of the dark optical fiber to determine whether the dark optical fiber is faulty. When it is determined that the dark optical fiber is faulty, it is determined that the optical fiber link is faulty. However, setting a dark fiber will take up a certain amount of fiber resources, which cannot be applied in areas with relatively tight fiber resources, and requires staff to perform performance tests on the dark fiber. Therefore, the degree of automation is low, the error rate is high, and the efficiency is low. In the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the device can automatically perform fault detection on the optical fiber link, with a high degree of automation, high accuracy, and high efficiency, and there is no need to set a dark optical fiber, which avoids the waste of optical fiber resources.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的光纤链路连接有设备,附图中均以光纤链路位于连接的设备外,且光纤链路上设置的调光单元也位于该设备外为例。可选地,光纤链路也可以有一部分伸入连接的设备内,本申请实施例对此不作限定。此时,光纤链路上设置的调光单元可以位于光纤链路连接的设备内也可以位于该设备外,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that the optical fiber links in the embodiments of the present application are connected to devices. In the drawings, the optical fiber links are located outside the connected devices, and the dimming unit provided on the optical fiber links is also located outside the device as an example. Optionally, a part of the optical fiber link may extend into the connected device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. At this time, the dimming unit provided on the optical fiber link may be located inside or outside the device connected to the optical fiber link, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例提供了一种光纤端口识别装置,可以用于本申请实施例提供的通信系统中的第一设备,如图14所示,该光纤端口识别装置包括:The embodiment of the present application provides an optical fiber port identification device, which can be used for the first device in the communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 14, the optical fiber port identification device includes:
处理模块605,用于获取多条光纤链路中每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:光纤端口对应的调光单元在光纤链路上的排布规律;The processing module 605 is used to obtain the target signal of the fiber port on each fiber link in the multiple fiber links, and the target signal of the fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit corresponding to the fiber port on the fiber link ;
接收模块609,用于接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,多条光纤链路包括第一光纤链路,编码信号由第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射第一波段内的信号后得到;The receiving module 609 is used to receive the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link. The multiple optical fiber links include the first optical fiber link. The encoded signal is reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link after the signal in the first waveband is reflected get;
处理模块605还用于根据编码信号,以及每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。The processing module 605 is further configured to identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
可选地,光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与每个光纤端口的距离小于距离阈值,且与多个光纤端口中除每个光纤端口之外的其他光纤端口的距离大于或等于距离阈值;处理模块605用于:确定编码信号中对应第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,检测子信号由每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元反射第一波段内的信号后得到;根据第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。Optionally, a plurality of optical fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than the distance threshold. The distance of other optical fiber ports is greater than or equal to the distance threshold; the processing module 605 is used to: determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein, the detection sub-signal is determined by the multiple corresponding to each optical fiber port. A dimming unit is obtained after reflecting the signal in the first waveband; according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link, and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, the first optical fiber link On the fiber port to identify it.
可选地,光纤链路上具有每个光纤端口对应的等间距排布的多个目标位置;每个光纤端口对应的多个调光单元设置在多个目标位置中的至少部分目标位置上,且至少部分目标位置包括:多个目标位置中的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置;处理模块605用于:根据单位时长以及每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量,确定编码信号中对应第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,单位时长为:第一波段内的信号在多个目标位置中相邻目标位置间的光纤链路上传输所需的时长。Optionally, the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; a plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port are arranged on at least a part of the plurality of target positions, And at least part of the target position includes: the first target position and the last target position among the multiple target positions; the processing module 605 is configured to: determine the corresponding target position in the coded signal according to the unit duration and the number of target positions corresponding to each fiber port The detection sub-signal of each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link; wherein the unit time length is: the time required for the signal in the first band to be transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the multiple target positions.
可选地,在目标方向上,不同光纤链路上相同次序的光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,目标方向包括:靠近或远离第一设备的方向;光纤端口识别装置还包括:确定每条光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的次序,光纤端口对应的次序为:在目标方向上,光纤端口在所在的光纤链路上的多个光纤端口中的次序;处理模块605用于:在目标方向上,若第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口对应的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第一光纤端口的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致,则将第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口识别为第一光纤端口,第一光纤端口为对应目标次序的任一光纤端口。Optionally, in the target direction, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports in the same order on different fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: a direction close to or away from the first device; the optical fiber port identification device further includes: Determine the order corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link. The corresponding order of the optical fiber ports is: in the target direction, the order of the optical fiber ports among the multiple optical fiber ports on the optical fiber link; the processing module 605 is used for : In the target direction, if the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port of the target order on the first optical fiber link is the same as the arrangement of the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first optical fiber port If the distribution rules are consistent, the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link is identified as the first optical fiber port, and the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
可选地,第一设备连接有多级支路,且每级支路包括多条支路;每条第1级支路与第一设备连接,每条支路与多条下一级支路连接,且不同支路连接的下一级支路不同;光纤链路包括:多级支路中每级支路中的一条支路;光纤链路上设置的光纤端口包括:每级支路上靠近第一设备的光纤端口;不同第1级支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,同一支路连接的多条支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同;光纤端口识别装置还包括:确定每个光纤端口对应的端口组,其中,每个第1级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:每个第1级支路上的光纤端口;每个第i级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:每个第i级支路上的光纤端口,以及每个第i级支路上的光纤端口连接的前i-1级支路上的光纤端口,i≥2;处理模块605用于:在第一光纤链路上靠近第一设备的前j个光纤端口的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第二光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致时,将第一光纤链路上靠近第一设备的第j个光纤端口识别为第二光纤端口,第二光纤端口为多条光纤链路上的任一光纤端口。Optionally, the first device is connected with multiple branches, and each branch includes multiple branches; each first-level branch is connected to the first device, and each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches The next level of branches connected to different branches is different; the optical fiber link includes: one branch of each level of the multi-level branch; the optical fiber port set on the optical fiber link includes: each level of branch is close to The optical fiber port of the first device; the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on the different first-level branches are different, and the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on the multiple branches connected to the same branch are different; the optical fiber ports The identification device further includes: determining the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch includes: the optical fiber port on each level 1 branch; each i-th level branch The port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on the road includes: the optical fiber port on each i-th branch, and the optical fiber port on the first i-1 branch connected to the optical fiber port on each i-th branch, i≥2; processing The module 605 is used for: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signals of the first j optical fiber ports close to the first device on the first optical fiber link, and the target signal of the port group corresponding to the second optical fiber port When the arrangement rules of the indicated dimming units are consistent, the j-th optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link close to the first device is identified as the second optical fiber port, and the second optical fiber port is any one of the multiple optical fiber links Fiber optic port.
可选地,第一设备通过第一光纤链路连接至第二设备,接收模块609用于:接收第二设备通过第一光纤链路发送的编码信号;其中,编码信号为:第二设备在向第一光纤链路发送第一波段内的信号后发送的信号,调光单元还用于透射第一波段外的信号,编码信号的波长位于第一波段外。Optionally, the first device is connected to the second device through a first optical fiber link, and the receiving module 609 is configured to: receive an encoded signal sent by the second device through the first optical fiber link; where the encoded signal is: the second device is in The signal sent after sending the signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, the dimming unit is also used to transmit the signal outside the first waveband, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first waveband.
可选地,请继续参考图14,光纤端口识别装置还包括:第一发送模块601,用于向第一光纤链路发送第一波段内的信号。Optionally, please continue to refer to FIG. 14, the optical fiber port identification device further includes: a first sending module 601 configured to send a signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link.
可选地,处理模块605还用于:确定每条光纤链路的参考信号,光纤链路的参考信号用于指示:光纤链路上所有调光单元的排布规律;在编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律, 与多条光纤链路的参考信号所指示的排布规律均不同时,确定第一光纤链路故障。Optionally, the processing module 605 is further configured to: determine the reference signal of each optical fiber link, and the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link; When the arrangement rule of the dimming unit is different from the arrangement rule indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, it is determined that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
可选地,处理模块605还用于:根据编码信号,确定第一光纤链路中故障的链路段。Optionally, the processing module 605 is further configured to determine the faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal.
可选地,第一波段的带宽的范围为2纳米至10纳米,和/或,第一波段的信号的波长与第一波段的中心波长之差的绝对值≤5纳米。Optionally, the bandwidth of the first waveband ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the absolute value of the difference between the wavelength of the signal in the first waveband and the center wavelength of the first waveband is less than or equal to 5 nanometers.
可选地,本申请实施例提供的光纤端口识别装置的结构可以如图6所示,此时,上述接收模块609包括:图6中的滤波器602和环形器603;在图6中,处理模块605分别连接第一发送模块601和环形器603,环形器603连接滤波器602和第一发送模块601,滤波器602连接第一光纤链路;处理模块605用于控制第一发送模块601向环形器603发送第一波段的信号;环形器603用于向滤波器602发送来自第一发送模块601的信号,滤波器602用于向第一光纤链路发送来自环形器603的信号;滤波器602用于接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,以及向环形器603发送来自第一光纤链路的编码信号;环形器603用于向处理模块605发送来自滤波器601的编码信号。Optionally, the structure of the optical fiber port identification device provided by the embodiment of the present application may be as shown in FIG. 6. At this time, the receiving module 609 includes: a filter 602 and a circulator 603 in FIG. 6; The module 605 is respectively connected to the first sending module 601 and the circulator 603, the circulator 603 is connected to the filter 602 and the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 is connected to the first optical fiber link; the processing module 605 is used to control the first sending module 601 to The circulator 603 transmits the signal of the first band; the circulator 603 is used to transmit the signal from the first transmitting module 601 to the filter 602, and the filter 602 is used to transmit the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link; 602 is used to receive the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link and send the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator 603; the circulator 603 is used to send the encoded signal from the filter 601 to the processing module 605.
本申请实施例提供了另一种光纤端口识别装置,可以用于本申请实施例提供的通信系统中的第二设备,如图15所示,该光纤端口识别装置包括:The embodiment of the present application provides another optical fiber port identification device, which can be used for the second device in the communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 15, the optical fiber port identification device includes:
第一发送模块601,用于向第一光纤链路发送第一波段内的信号;The first sending module 601 is configured to send signals in the first band to the first optical fiber link;
接收模块609,用于接收第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号;The receiving module 609 is configured to receive the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link;
第二发送模块604,用于根据从第一光纤链路上接收到的信号,通过第一光纤链路向第一设备发送编码信号,编码信号的波长位于第一波段外。The second sending module 604 is configured to send an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link according to the signal received from the first optical fiber link, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first wavelength band.
可选地,本申请实施例提供的光纤端口识别装置的结构可以如图6所示,此时,上述接收模块609包括:图6中的滤波器602和环形器603;光纤端口识别装置还包括处理模块605,处理模块605分别连接第一发送模块601、第二发送模块604和环形器603,环形器603连接滤波器602和第一发送模块601,滤波器602连接第二发送模块604和第一光纤链路;处理模块605用于控制第一发送模块601向环形器603发送第一波段的信号;环形器603用于向滤波器602发送来自第一发送模块601的信号;滤波器602用于向第一光纤链路发送来自环形器603的信号;滤波器602用于接收第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的第一波段内的信号,以及向环形器603发送来自第一光纤链路的信号;环形器603用于向处理模块605发送来自滤波器602的信号;处理模块605用于根据来自环形器603的信号,控制第二发送模块604向滤波器602发送编码信号;滤波器602用于向第一光纤链路发送来自第二发送模块604的信号。Optionally, the structure of the optical fiber port identification device provided by the embodiment of the present application may be as shown in FIG. 6. At this time, the receiving module 609 includes: the filter 602 and the circulator 603 in FIG. 6; the optical fiber port identification device also includes The processing module 605 is connected to the first sending module 601, the second sending module 604, and the circulator 603, respectively, the circulator 603 connects the filter 602 and the first sending module 601, and the filter 602 connects the second sending module 604 and the first sending module 604. An optical fiber link; the processing module 605 is used to control the first sending module 601 to send signals of the first band to the circulator 603; the circulator 603 is used to send signals from the first sending module 601 to the filter 602; the filter 602 is used To send the signal from the circulator 603 to the first optical fiber link; the filter 602 is used to receive the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link, and to send the signal from the first optical fiber to the circulator 603 The signal of the link; the circulator 603 is used to send the signal from the filter 602 to the processing module 605; the processing module 605 is used to control the second sending module 604 to send the encoded signal to the filter 602 according to the signal from the circulator 603; The converter 602 is configured to send the signal from the second sending module 604 to the first optical fiber link.
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。该网络设备可以是本申请实施例提供的通信系统中的任一设备(如上述第一设备或第二设备)。如图16所示,该网络设备200包括:处理器202和存储器201,其中,存储器201用于存储程序,处理器202用于调用存储器201中存储的程序,以使得该网络设备执行相应的方法或功能。可选地,如图16所示,该网络设备200还可以包括至少一个通信接口203和至少一个通信总线204。存储器201、处理器202以及通信接口203通过通信总线204通信连接。其中,通信接口203用于在处理器202的控制下与其他装置通信,处理器202可以通过通信总线204调用存储器201中存储的程序。FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application. The network device may be any device in the communication system provided in the embodiment of the present application (such as the first device or the second device mentioned above). As shown in FIG. 16, the network device 200 includes a processor 202 and a memory 201, where the memory 201 is used to store programs, and the processor 202 is used to call the programs stored in the memory 201, so that the network device executes corresponding methods. Or function. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 16, the network device 200 may further include at least one communication interface 203 and at least one communication bus 204. The memory 201, the processor 202, and the communication interface 203 are communicatively connected through a communication bus 204. The communication interface 203 is used to communicate with other devices under the control of the processor 202, and the processor 202 can call a program stored in the memory 201 through the communication bus 204.
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,该存储介质内存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被处理器执行时实现本申请实施例提供的任一种光纤端口识别方法。The embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium in which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed by a processor, any optical fiber port identification method provided in the embodiment of the present application is implemented.
本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在网络设备上运行时,使得网络设备执行本申请实施例提供的任一种光纤端口识别方法。The embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions. When the computer program product runs on a network device, the network device executes any of the optical fiber port identification methods provided in the embodiments of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现,所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机的可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储装置。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质,或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘)等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part, and the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data. The center transmits to another website, computer, server, or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium, or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state hard disk).
在本申请中,术语“第一”和“第二”等仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性。术语“至少一个”指一个或多个,“多个”指两个或两个以上,除非另有明确的限定。In this application, the terms "first" and "second", etc. are only used for descriptive purposes, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance. The term "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more, unless expressly defined otherwise.
本申请实施例提供的方法实施例和装置实施例等不同类型的实施例均可以相互参考,本申请实施例对此不做限定。本申请实施例提供的方法实施例操作的先后顺序能够进行适当调整,操作也能够根据情况进行相应增减,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化的方法,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内,因此不再赘述。Different types of embodiments such as method embodiments and device embodiments provided in the embodiments of the present application can be referred to each other, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. The sequence of operations of the method embodiments provided in the embodiments of this application can be appropriately adjusted, and the operations can be increased or decreased accordingly according to the situation. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes within the technical scope disclosed in this application. The methods should all be covered in the scope of protection of this application, so I won’t repeat them here.
在本申请提供的相应实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、设备和装置等可以通过其它的构成方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性或其它的形式。In the corresponding embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, equipment, device, etc. may be implemented in other structural manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or integrated. To another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical or other forms.
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元描述的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,既可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络设备(例如终端设备)上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components described as units may or may not be physical units, and may be located in one place or distributed to multiple network devices (such as terminal devices). )superior. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到各种等效的修改或替换,这些修改或替换都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Anyone familiar with the technical field can easily think of various equivalents within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Modifications or replacements, these modifications or replacements shall be covered within the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (32)

  1. 一种光纤端口识别方法,其特征在于,用于第一设备,所述第一设备连接有多条光纤链路,所述光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及所述光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;所述调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,且所述光纤链路上调光单元对所述第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1;An optical fiber port identification method, characterized in that it is used for a first device, the first device is connected to multiple optical fiber links, the optical fiber links are provided with optical fiber ports, and the multiple optical fiber ports correspond to Dimming unit, and the arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different; the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the dimming unit on the optical fiber link treats the second The sum of the reflectivity of the signals in one band is less than or equal to 1;
    所述方法包括:The method includes:
    获取所述多条光纤链路中每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,所述光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:所述光纤端口对应的调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律;Obtain the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link in the multiple optical fiber links, where the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the arrangement of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port on the optical fiber link Distribution law
    接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,所述多条光纤链路包括所述第一光纤链路,所述编码信号由所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射所述第一波段内的信号后得到;Receiving an encoded signal from a first optical fiber link, the plurality of optical fiber links including the first optical fiber link, and the encoded signal is reflected in the first wavelength band by a dimming unit on the first optical fiber link After the signal within;
    根据所述编码信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。Identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律包括:所述光纤链路上所述调光单元的个数,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的位置,以及所述光纤链路上相邻所述调光单元的间隔中的至少一种。The method according to claim 1, wherein the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link comprises: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, and the dimming unit At least one of the position of the unit on the optical fiber link and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与所述每个光纤端口的距离小于距离阈值,且与所述多个光纤端口中除所述每个光纤端口之外的其他光纤端口的距离大于或等于距离阈值;The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a plurality of optical fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold, And the distance from the other optical fiber ports except for each optical fiber port among the plurality of optical fiber ports is greater than or equal to a distance threshold;
    所述根据所述编码信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,包括:The identifying the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link includes:
    确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,所述检测子信号由所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元反射所述第一波段内的信号后得到;Determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein, the detection sub-signal is reflected by the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port. Obtained after the signal in the first band;
    根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。Identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述光纤链路上具有所述每个光纤端口对应的等间距排布的多个目标位置;所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元设置在所述多个目标位置中的至少部分目标位置上,且所述至少部分目标位置包括:所述多个目标位置中的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置;The method according to claim 3, wherein the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; the plurality of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port The dimming unit is arranged on at least part of the target positions among the plurality of target positions, and the at least part of the target positions includes: the first target position and the last target position among the plurality of target positions;
    所述确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号,包括:The determining the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal includes:
    根据单位时长以及所述每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量,确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,所述单位时长为:所述第一波段内的信号在所述多个目标位置中相邻目标位置间的光纤链路上传输所需的时长。According to the unit duration and the number of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port, the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal is determined; wherein, the unit duration is: The time required for the signal in the first waveband to be transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the plurality of target positions.
  5. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,在目标方向上,不同光纤链路上相同次序的光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,所述目标方向包括:靠近或远离所述第一设备的方向;The method according to claim 3 or 4, wherein, in the target direction, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the same order of fiber ports on different fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: approaching or farther away The direction of the first device;
    所述方法还包括:确定所述每条光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的次序,所述光纤端口对应的次序为:在所述目标方向上,所述光纤端口在所在的光纤链路上的多个光纤端口中的次序;The method further includes: determining the sequence corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, and the sequence corresponding to the optical fiber port is: in the target direction, the optical fiber port is located on the optical fiber link. The order among the multiple optical fiber ports;
    所述根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路 上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,包括:Said identifying the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link ,include:
    在所述目标方向上,若所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口对应的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第一光纤端口的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致,则将所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口识别为所述第一光纤端口,所述第一光纤端口为对应所述目标次序的任一光纤端口。In the target direction, if the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signals corresponding to the fiber ports of the target order on the first fiber link is the same as the dimming unit indicated by the target signal of the first fiber port If the arrangement rules of the units are consistent, the optical fiber port in the target order on the first optical fiber link is identified as the first optical fiber port, and the first optical fiber port is any optical fiber port corresponding to the target order.
  6. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一设备连接有多级支路,且每级支路包括多条支路;每条第1级支路与所述第一设备连接,每条支路与多条下一级支路连接,且不同支路连接的下一级支路不同;所述光纤链路包括:所述多级支路中每级支路中的一条支路;所述光纤链路上设置的光纤端口包括:每级支路上靠近所述第一设备的光纤端口;不同第1级支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,同一支路连接的多条支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同;The method according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the first device is connected with multi-level branches, and each level of the branch includes multiple branches; each first-level branch is connected to the first Device connection, each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches, and the lower-level branches connected by different branches are different; the optical fiber link includes: One branch; the optical fiber ports set on the optical fiber link include: the optical fiber ports on each branch close to the first device; the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on different first branches are different, and the same The arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on the multiple branches connected by the branches are different;
    所述方法还包括:确定每个光纤端口对应的端口组,其中,每个第1级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第1级支路上的光纤端口;每个第i级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口,以及所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口连接的前i-1级支路上的光纤端口,i≥2;The method further includes: determining the port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each first-level branch includes: the optical fiber port on each first-level branch; The port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on the i-level branch includes: the optical fiber port on each i-th branch, and the optical fiber on the front i-1 level branch to which the optical fiber port on each i-th branch is connected Port, i≥2;
    所述根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别,包括:Said identifying the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link ,include:
    在所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的前j个光纤端口的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第二光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致时,将所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的第j个光纤端口识别为所述第二光纤端口,所述第二光纤端口为所述多条光纤链路上的任一光纤端口。The arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signals of the first j optical fiber ports close to the first device on the first optical fiber link is indicated by the target signal of the port group corresponding to the second optical fiber port When the arrangement rules of the dimming units are the same, the j-th optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link close to the first device is identified as the second optical fiber port, and the second optical fiber port is the Any fiber port on multiple fiber links.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多条第1级支路均通过初始支路与所述第一设备连接;The method according to claim 6, wherein the multiple first-level branches are all connected to the first device through an initial branch;
    所述光纤端口对应的一部分调光单元位于所述光纤端口所在的支路上,所述光纤端口对应的另一部分调光单元位于所述光纤端口连接的支路上。A part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located on the branch where the optical fiber port is located, and another part of the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is located on the branch connected to the optical fiber port.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一设备通过所述第一光纤链路连接至第二设备,所述接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the first device is connected to the second device through the first optical fiber link, and the receiving an encoded signal from the first optical fiber link includes :
    接收所述第二设备通过所述第一光纤链路发送的所述编码信号;Receiving the encoded signal sent by the second device through the first optical fiber link;
    其中,所述编码信号为:所述第二设备在向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号后发送的信号,所述调光单元还用于透射所述第一波段外的信号,所述编码信号的波长位于所述第一波段外。Wherein, the encoded signal is a signal sent by the second device after sending a signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, and the dimming unit is also used to transmit the first waveband For external signals, the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first band.
  9. 根据权利要求1至5任一所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that, before the receiving the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, the method further comprises:
    向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号。Sending the signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link.
  10. 根据权利要求1至9任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    确定所述每条光纤链路的参考信号,所述光纤链路的参考信号用于指示:所述光纤链路上所有调光单元的排布规律;Determine the reference signal of each optical fiber link, where the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link;
    在所述编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与所述多条光纤链路的参考信号所指示的排布规律均不同时,确定所述第一光纤链路故障。When the arrangement law of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement law indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, it is determined that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,在确定所述第一光纤链路故障之后,所 述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein after determining that the first optical fiber link fails, the method further comprises:
    根据所述编码信号,确定所述第一光纤链路中故障的链路段。According to the encoded signal, a faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link is determined.
  12. 根据权利要求1至11任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述调光单元包括:光栅。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the dimming unit comprises: a grating.
  13. 根据权利要求1至12任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波段的带宽的范围为2纳米至10纳米,和/或,所述第一波段的信号的波长与所述第一波段的中心波长之差的绝对值≤5纳米。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the bandwidth of the first wavelength band ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the wavelength of the signal in the first wavelength band is the same as that of the first wavelength band. The absolute value of the difference between the center wavelengths of a band is less than or equal to 5 nanometers.
  14. 一种光纤端口识别方法,其特征在于,用于第二设备,所述第二设备通过第一光纤链路连接至第一设备,所述第一设备连接有多条光纤链路,所述第一光纤链路为所述多条光纤链路中的任一光纤链路,所述光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及所述光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;所述调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,以及透射所述第一波段外的信号,且所述光纤链路上调光单元对所述第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1;An optical fiber port identification method, characterized in that it is used for a second device, the second device is connected to a first device through a first optical fiber link, and the first device is connected to a plurality of optical fiber links. An optical fiber link is any optical fiber link of the plurality of optical fiber links, the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port, and a plurality of dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port, and different optical fiber links The arrangement rules of the dimming unit are different; the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband and transmit the signal outside the first waveband, and the dimming unit on the optical fiber link treats the The sum of the reflectivity of the signals in the first band is less than or equal to 1;
    所述方法包括:The method includes:
    向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号;Sending the signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link;
    接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号;Receiving the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link;
    根据从所述第一光纤链路上接收到的信号,通过所述第一光纤链路向所述第一设备发送编码信号,所述编码信号的波长位于所述第一波段外。According to the signal received from the first optical fiber link, an encoded signal is sent to the first device through the first optical fiber link, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first wavelength band.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律包括:所述光纤链路上所述调光单元的个数,所述调光单元在所述光纤链路上的位置,以及所述光纤链路上相邻所述调光单元的间隔中的至少一种。The method according to claim 14, wherein the arrangement rule of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link comprises: the number of the dimming unit on the optical fiber link, the dimming unit At least one of the position of the unit on the optical fiber link and the distance between adjacent dimming units on the optical fiber link.
  16. 一种光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,用于第一设备,所述第一设备连接有多条光纤链路,所述光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及所述光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;所述调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,且所述光纤链路上调光单元对所述第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1;An optical fiber port identification device, which is characterized in that it is used for a first device, the first device is connected to a plurality of optical fiber links, the optical fiber links are provided with optical fiber ports, and the plurality of optical fiber ports correspond to Dimming unit, and the arrangement of the dimming unit on different optical fiber links is different; the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the dimming unit on the optical fiber link treats the second The sum of the reflectivity of the signals in one band is less than or equal to 1;
    所述光纤端口识别装置包括:The optical fiber port identification device includes:
    处理模块,用于获取所述多条光纤链路中每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,所述光纤端口的目标信号用于指示:所述光纤端口对应的调光单元在所述光纤链路上的排布规律;The processing module is used to obtain the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link in the multiple optical fiber links, and the target signal of the optical fiber port is used to indicate: the dimming unit corresponding to the optical fiber port is in the optical fiber Arrangement law on the link;
    接收模块,用于接收来自第一光纤链路的编码信号,所述多条光纤链路包括所述第一光纤链路,所述编码信号由所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射所述第一波段内的信号后得到;The receiving module is configured to receive an encoded signal from a first optical fiber link, the multiple optical fiber links including the first optical fiber link, and the encoded signal is reflected by a dimming unit on the first optical fiber link Obtained after the signal in the first waveband;
    所述处理模块还用于根据所述编码信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。The processing module is further configured to identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the encoded signal and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述光纤链路上设置有多个光纤端口,每个光纤端口对应的调光单元与所述每个光纤端口的距离小于距离阈值,且与所述多个光纤端口中除所述每个光纤端口之外的其他光纤端口的距离大于或等于距离阈值;所述处理模块用于:The optical fiber port identification device according to claim 16, wherein a plurality of optical fiber ports are provided on the optical fiber link, and the distance between the dimming unit corresponding to each optical fiber port and each optical fiber port is less than a distance threshold. , And the distance from the other optical fiber ports except for each optical fiber port among the plurality of optical fiber ports is greater than or equal to a distance threshold; the processing module is used for:
    确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,所述检测子信号由所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元反射所述第一波段内的信号后得到;Determine the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal; wherein, the detection sub-signal is reflected by the plurality of dimming units corresponding to each optical fiber port. Obtained after the signal in the first band;
    根据所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的检测子信号,以及所述每条光纤链路上光纤端口的目标信号,对所述第一光纤链路上的光纤端口进行识别。Identify the optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link according to the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link and the target signal of the optical fiber port on each optical fiber link.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述光纤链路上具有所述 每个光纤端口对应的等间距排布的多个目标位置;所述每个光纤端口对应的所述多个调光单元设置在所述多个目标位置中的至少部分目标位置上,且所述至少部分目标位置包括:所述多个目标位置中的第一个目标位置和最后一个目标位置;The optical fiber port identification device according to claim 17, wherein the optical fiber link has a plurality of target positions arranged at equal intervals corresponding to each optical fiber port; The plurality of dimming units are arranged on at least part of the target positions among the plurality of target positions, and the at least part of the target positions includes: the first target position and the last target position among the plurality of target positions;
    所述处理模块用于:The processing module is used for:
    根据单位时长以及所述每个光纤端口对应的目标位置的数量,确定所述编码信号中对应所述第一光纤链路上每个光纤端口的检测子信号;其中,所述单位时长为:所述第一波段内的信号在所述多个目标位置中相邻目标位置间的光纤链路上传输所需的时长。According to the unit duration and the number of target positions corresponding to each optical fiber port, the detection sub-signal corresponding to each optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link in the encoded signal is determined; wherein, the unit duration is: The time required for the signal in the first waveband to be transmitted on the optical fiber link between adjacent target positions among the plurality of target positions.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,在目标方向上,不同光纤链路上相同次序的光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,所述目标方向包括:靠近或远离所述第一设备的方向;The optical fiber port identification device according to claim 17 or 18, wherein in the target direction, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the same order of the optical fiber ports on different optical fiber links are different, and the target direction includes: The direction approaching or away from the first device;
    所述光纤端口识别装置还包括:确定所述每条光纤链路上每个光纤端口对应的次序,所述光纤端口对应的次序为:在所述目标方向上,所述光纤端口在所在的光纤链路上的多个光纤端口中的次序;The optical fiber port identification device further includes: determining an order corresponding to each optical fiber port on each optical fiber link, and the corresponding order of the optical fiber port is: in the target direction, the optical fiber port is located on the optical fiber where the optical fiber port is located. Sequence among multiple fiber ports on the link;
    所述处理模块用于:在所述目标方向上,若所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口对应的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第一光纤端口的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致,则将所述第一光纤链路上目标次序的光纤端口识别为所述第一光纤端口,所述第一光纤端口为对应所述目标次序的任一光纤端口。The processing module is configured to: in the target direction, if the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signal corresponding to the optical fiber port of the target order on the first optical fiber link is the same as that of the first optical fiber port If the arrangement rules of the dimming units indicated by the target signal are consistent, the optical fiber port of the target order on the first optical fiber link is identified as the first optical fiber port, and the first optical fiber port corresponds to the target order Any of the fiber ports.
  20. 根据权利要求17或18所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述第一设备连接有多级支路,且每级支路包括多条支路;每条第1级支路与所述第一设备连接,每条支路与多条下一级支路连接,且不同支路连接的下一级支路不同;所述光纤链路包括:所述多级支路中每级支路中的一条支路;所述光纤链路上设置的光纤端口包括:每级支路上靠近所述第一设备的光纤端口;不同第1级支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同,同一支路连接的多条支路上光纤端口对应的调光单元的排布规律不同;The optical fiber port identification device according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the first device is connected with multi-level branches, and each level of the branch includes multiple branches; In the first device connection, each branch is connected to multiple lower-level branches, and the lower-level branches connected by different branches are different; the optical fiber link includes: each branch in the multi-level branch A branch in the road; the optical fiber ports set on the optical fiber link include: the optical fiber ports on each branch near the first device; the arrangement of the dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber ports on the different first-level branches Different, the arrangement rules of the dimming units corresponding to the fiber ports on multiple branches connected to the same branch are different;
    所述光纤端口识别装置还包括:确定每个光纤端口对应的端口组,其中,每个第1级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第1级支路上的光纤端口;每个第i级支路上的光纤端口对应的端口组包括:所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口,以及所述每个第i级支路上的光纤端口连接的前i-1级支路上的光纤端口,i≥2;The optical fiber port identification device further includes: determining a port group corresponding to each optical fiber port, wherein the port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each first-level branch includes: the optical fiber port on each first-level branch; The port group corresponding to the optical fiber port on each i-th branch includes: the optical fiber port on each i-th branch, and the first i-1 level branch connected to the optical fiber port on each i-th branch Optical fiber port on the road, i≥2;
    所述处理模块用于:在所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的前j个光纤端口的检测子信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与第二光纤端口对应的端口组的目标信号所指示的调光单元的排布规律一致时,将所述第一光纤链路上靠近所述第一设备的第j个光纤端口识别为所述第二光纤端口,所述第二光纤端口为所述多条光纤链路上的任一光纤端口。The processing module is used for: the arrangement rule of the dimming unit reflected by the detection sub-signals of the first j optical fiber ports close to the first device on the first optical fiber link corresponds to the second optical fiber port When the arrangement rules of the dimming units indicated by the target signals of the port group are consistent, the j-th optical fiber port on the first optical fiber link close to the first device is identified as the second optical fiber port, and The second optical fiber port is any optical fiber port on the multiple optical fiber links.
  21. 根据权利要求16至20任一所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述第一设备通过所述第一光纤链路连接至第二设备,所述接收模块用于:The optical fiber port identification device according to any one of claims 16 to 20, wherein the first device is connected to the second device through the first optical fiber link, and the receiving module is used for:
    接收所述第二设备通过所述第一光纤链路发送的所述编码信号;Receiving the encoded signal sent by the second device through the first optical fiber link;
    其中,所述编码信号为:所述第二设备在向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号后发送的信号,所述调光单元还用于透射所述第一波段外的信号,所述编码信号的波长位于所述第一波段外。Wherein, the encoded signal is a signal sent by the second device after sending a signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link, and the dimming unit is also used to transmit the first waveband For external signals, the wavelength of the encoded signal is outside the first band.
  22. 根据权利要求16至19任一所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述光纤端口识别装置还包括:The optical fiber port identification device according to any one of claims 16 to 19, wherein the optical fiber port identification device further comprises:
    第一发送模块,用于向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号。The first sending module is configured to send the signal in the first waveband to the first optical fiber link.
  23. 根据权利要求16至22任一所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块还用于:The optical fiber port identification device according to any one of claims 16 to 22, wherein the processing module is further configured to:
    确定所述每条光纤链路的参考信号,所述光纤链路的参考信号用于指示:所述光纤链路上所有调光单元的排布规律;Determine the reference signal of each optical fiber link, where the reference signal of the optical fiber link is used to indicate: the arrangement rule of all dimming units on the optical fiber link;
    在所述编码信号所反映的调光单元的排布规律,与所述多条光纤链路的参考信号所指示的排布规律均不同时,确定所述第一光纤链路故障。When the arrangement law of the dimming unit reflected by the encoded signal is different from the arrangement law indicated by the reference signals of the multiple optical fiber links, it is determined that the first optical fiber link is faulty.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块还用于:The optical fiber port identification device according to claim 23, wherein the processing module is further configured to:
    根据所述编码信号,确定所述第一光纤链路中故障的链路段。According to the encoded signal, a faulty link segment in the first optical fiber link is determined.
  25. 根据权利要求16至24任一所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述第一波段的带宽的范围为2纳米至10纳米,和/或,所述第一波段的信号的波长与所述第一波段的中心波长之差的绝对值≤5纳米。The optical fiber port identification device according to any one of claims 16 to 24, wherein the bandwidth of the first wavelength band ranges from 2 nanometers to 10 nanometers, and/or the wavelength of the signal in the first wavelength band is equal to The absolute value of the difference between the center wavelengths of the first waveband is less than or equal to 5 nanometers.
  26. 根据权利要求22所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块包括:滤波器和环形器;所述处理模块分别连接所述第一发送模块和所述环形器,所述环形器连接所述滤波器和所述第一发送模块,所述滤波器连接所述第一光纤链路;The optical fiber port identification device according to claim 22, wherein the receiving module comprises: a filter and a circulator; the processing module is respectively connected to the first sending module and the circulator, and the circulator Connecting the filter and the first sending module, and the filter is connected to the first optical fiber link;
    所述处理模块用于控制所述第一发送模块向所述环形器发送所述第一波段的信号;所述环形器用于向所述滤波器发送来自所述第一发送模块的信号,所述滤波器用于向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述环形器的信号;The processing module is used to control the first sending module to send the first waveband signal to the circulator; the circulator is used to send the signal from the first sending module to the filter, the The filter is used to send the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link;
    所述滤波器用于接收来自所述第一光纤链路的所述编码信号,以及向所述环形器发送来自所述第一光纤链路的所述编码信号;所述环形器用于向所述处理模块发送来自所述滤波器的所述编码信号。The filter is used to receive the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link, and to send the encoded signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator; the circulator is used to transmit the The module sends the encoded signal from the filter.
  27. 一种光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,用于第二设备,所述第二设备通过第一光纤链路连接至第一设备,所述第一设备连接有多条光纤链路,所述第一光纤链路为所述多条光纤链路中的任一光纤链路,所述光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及所述光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;所述调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,以及透射所述第一波段外的信号,且所述光纤链路上调光单元对所述第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1;An optical fiber port identification device, characterized in that it is used for a second device, the second device is connected to a first device through a first optical fiber link, and the first device is connected to a plurality of optical fiber links. An optical fiber link is any optical fiber link of the plurality of optical fiber links, the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port, and a plurality of dimming units corresponding to the optical fiber port, and different optical fiber links The arrangement rules of the dimming unit are different; the dimming unit is used to reflect signals in the first waveband and transmit signals outside the first waveband, and the optical fiber link up the dimming unit to the The sum of the reflectivity of the signals in the first band is less than or equal to 1;
    所述光纤端口识别装置包括:The optical fiber port identification device includes:
    第一发送模块,用于向所述第一光纤链路发送所述第一波段内的信号;A first sending module, configured to send a signal in the first band to the first optical fiber link;
    接收模块,用于接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号;A receiving module, configured to receive the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link;
    第二发送模块,用于根据从所述第一光纤链路上接收到的信号,通过所述第一光纤链路向所述第一设备发送编码信号,所述编码信号的波长位于所述第一波段外。The second sending module is configured to send an encoded signal to the first device through the first optical fiber link according to the signal received from the first optical fiber link, and the wavelength of the encoded signal is located in the first device. One band outside.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的光纤端口识别装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块包括:滤波器和环形器;所述光纤端口识别装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块分别连接所述第一发送模块、所述第二发送模块和所述环形器,所述环形器连接所述滤波器和所述第一发送模块,所述滤波器连接所述第二发送模块和所述第一光纤链路;The optical fiber port identification device according to claim 27, wherein the receiving module includes: a filter and a circulator; the optical fiber port identification device further includes a processing module, and the processing modules are respectively connected to the first transmission module. Module, the second transmission module and the circulator, the circulator connects the filter and the first transmission module, and the filter connects the second transmission module and the first optical fiber link ;
    所述处理模块用于控制所述第一发送模块向所述环形器发送所述第一波段的信号;所述环形器用于向所述滤波器发送来自所述第一发送模块的信号;所述滤波器用于向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述环形器的信号;The processing module is used to control the first sending module to send the first waveband signal to the circulator; the circulator is used to send the signal from the first sending module to the filter; The filter is used to send the signal from the circulator to the first optical fiber link;
    所述滤波器用于接收所述第一光纤链路上的调光单元反射的所述第一波段内的信号,以及向所述环形器发送来自所述第一光纤链路的信号;所述环形器用于向所述处理模块发送来 自所述滤波器的信号;The filter is configured to receive the signal in the first waveband reflected by the dimming unit on the first optical fiber link, and send the signal from the first optical fiber link to the circulator; the ring The device is used to send the signal from the filter to the processing module;
    所述处理模块用于根据来自所述环形器的信号,控制所述第二发送模块向所述滤波器发送所述编码信号;所述滤波器用于向所述第一光纤链路发送来自所述第二发送模块的信号。The processing module is used to control the second sending module to send the encoded signal to the filter according to the signal from the circulator; the filter is used to send the coded signal to the first optical fiber link The signal of the second sending module.
  29. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括:第一设备,以及所述第一设备连接的多条光纤链路,所述光纤链路上设置有光纤端口,以及所述光纤端口对应的多个调光单元,且不同光纤链路上所述调光单元的排布规律不同;所述调光单元用于反射第一波段内的信号,且所述光纤链路上调光单元对所述第一波段的信号的反射率之和小于或等于1;A communication system, characterized in that, the communication system includes: a first device, and a plurality of optical fiber links connected to the first device, the optical fiber link is provided with an optical fiber port, and the optical fiber port corresponds to The arrangement of the dimming units on different optical fiber links is different; the dimming unit is used to reflect the signal in the first waveband, and the dimming unit pairs on the optical fiber link The sum of the reflectances of the signals in the first waveband is less than or equal to 1;
    所述第一设备包括:权利要求16至26任一所述的光纤端口识别装置。The first device comprises: the optical fiber port identification device according to any one of claims 16 to 26.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统还包括:第二设备,且所述第一设备通过第一光纤链路连接至所述第二设备;The communication system according to claim 29, wherein the communication system further comprises: a second device, and the first device is connected to the second device through a first optical fiber link;
    所述第二设备包括:权利要求27或28所述的光纤端口识别装置。The second device comprises: the optical fiber port identification device of claim 27 or 28.
  31. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质内存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现权利要求1至15任一项所述的光纤端口识别方法。A computer storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the method for identifying an optical fiber port according to any one of claims 1 to 15 is realized.
  32. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,所述网络设备包括:至少一个处理器、至少一个接口、存储器和至少一个通信总线,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序,以实现权利要求1至15任一项所述的光纤端口识别方法。A network device, wherein the network device comprises: at least one processor, at least one interface, memory, and at least one communication bus, and the processor is configured to execute a program stored in the memory to implement claim 1. The optical fiber port identification method described in any one of to 15.
PCT/CN2021/080796 2020-03-17 2021-03-15 Optical fiber port identification method and apparatus, communication system, and network device WO2021185204A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010188685.2 2020-03-17
CN202010188685.2A CN113411120B (en) 2020-03-17 2020-03-17 Optical fiber port identification method and device, communication system and network equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021185204A1 true WO2021185204A1 (en) 2021-09-23

Family

ID=77677214

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/080796 WO2021185204A1 (en) 2020-03-17 2021-03-15 Optical fiber port identification method and apparatus, communication system, and network device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113411120B (en)
WO (1) WO2021185204A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103580749A (en) * 2013-11-27 2014-02-12 东南大学 Passive optical network chain monitoring system with address mark shunt and monitoring method
CN105187130A (en) * 2015-08-17 2015-12-23 东南大学 Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) cascading shunt encoding device and encoding and decoding methods
CN112054871A (en) * 2020-09-08 2020-12-08 东南大学 WDM-PON far-end shunt node with link monitoring function

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102244539B (en) * 2010-05-11 2014-09-17 华为技术有限公司 Method and system for detecting branch optical fibers, PON (passive optical network) and optical splitter
CN103297126B (en) * 2013-06-07 2016-06-22 广西师范大学 The PON line fault monitoring method of optically-based labelling method and device thereof
CN104579459B (en) * 2013-10-25 2018-03-16 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method, apparatus and system of fiber link identification
CN110474678B (en) * 2019-08-22 2021-06-01 华为技术有限公司 Method and system for acquiring optical fiber code and related equipment

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103580749A (en) * 2013-11-27 2014-02-12 东南大学 Passive optical network chain monitoring system with address mark shunt and monitoring method
CN105187130A (en) * 2015-08-17 2015-12-23 东南大学 Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) cascading shunt encoding device and encoding and decoding methods
CN112054871A (en) * 2020-09-08 2020-12-08 东南大学 WDM-PON far-end shunt node with link monitoring function

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SYUHAIMI MOHAMMAD: "Optical System Monitoring Based on Reflection Spectrum of Fiber Bragg Grating", JOURNAL OF COMPUTER SCIENCE, vol. 8, no. 6, 1 June 2012 (2012-06-01), United States, pages 1001 - 1007, XP055852060, ISSN: 1549-3636, DOI: 10.3844/jcssp.2012.1001.1007 *
ZHANG, XUAN ET AL.: "Remote coding scheme based on waveguide Bragg grating in PLC splitter chip for PON monitoring", OPTICS EXPRESS, vol. 24, no. 5, 7 March 2016 (2016-03-07), XP055852058 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113411120B (en) 2023-07-11
CN113411120A (en) 2021-09-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7434417B2 (en) Topology processing method, device, and system
US9774390B2 (en) Fiber link recognition method, device, and system
WO2021098341A1 (en) Port identification method and apparatus, system, and splitter
US20070201867A1 (en) Method, apparatus, system and computer program product for identifying failing or failed optical network terminal(s) on an optical distribution network
WO2012149709A1 (en) Method, apparatus and optical network system for detecting fault in optical distribution network
CN103368650B (en) The collocation method of optical fiber communication network
CN111836134B (en) Method, device, equipment and storage medium for acquiring network topology information
CN102006118B (en) Method for isolating long-emitting optical network units (ONU) in gigabit passive optical network (GPON)
CN101635610A (en) Optical communications system without using a special-purpose evaluation signal
WO2021135244A1 (en) Optical distribution device, optical communication detection system, and optical communication detection method
BR112012004398B1 (en) WAVE LENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXATION FILTER
CN110365405A (en) Photoelectric sensor detection method, device, readable storage medium storing program for executing and terminal device
EP2793411A1 (en) Apparatus and method for optical splitter port recognition, and method and apparatus for optical splitter temperature detection
WO2021185204A1 (en) Optical fiber port identification method and apparatus, communication system, and network device
CN108234056B (en) Single-fiber bidirectional time transfer method and system adopting same-wavelength half-duplex mode
CN102378072B (en) Frequency hopping period optical coding and decoding method and optical coder decoder
CN107070544B (en) Optical module, detection device using the same, and determination method
CN103812555B (en) Active network monitoring system and monitoring method thereof
CN101771469B (en) Customer premises optical network unit
WO2024055554A1 (en) Communication terminal, system and method based on all-optical ip address
CN108399137A (en) I2C switching method of the PON modules based on CPLD
CN108155934A (en) A kind of OLT ends optical transceiver module and method with time domain reflection function
US9735866B2 (en) Method, system and device for the supervision of optical fibres
CN208890804U (en) A kind of PON network tag end test device
CN218162462U (en) Distinguishable identification optical splitter, topological network and identification system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21771811

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21771811

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1